User’s Manual
SL4M™ and T4M™
RFID Smart Label and Thermal Printers
This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No
part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated or incorporated
in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic,
electronic, mechanical or otherwise, without the prior written consent of
Printronix.
COPYRIGHT © 2007 PRINTRONIX, INC. All rights reserved.
Trademark Acknowledgements
SL4M and T4M are trademarks of Printronix, Inc.
Printronix, IGP, IGP/Auto Label Mapping, PGL, and PrintNet are registered
trademarks of Printronix, Inc.
HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
IBM is registered trademark of International Business Machines Corp.
MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation.
IEEE is a registered service mark of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers, Inc.
ANSI is a registered trademark of American National Standards Institute, Inc.
EIA is a registered service mark of Electronic Industries Association.
Table of Contents
1 Introduction ......................................................... 11
The SL4M/T4M Thermal Printer .......................................................... 11
Standard Features ........................................................................ 11
Optional Features.......................................................................... 13
Thermal Printer Technology ................................................................ 14
The Printing Process ..................................................................... 14
Manual Conventions ............................................................................ 14
Warnings And Special Information ...................................................... 15
Related Documents ............................................................................. 15
Thermal Consumables......................................................................... 16
Media Selection............................................................................. 16
Ribbons ......................................................................................... 16
2 Operation ............................................................ 17
Unpacking The Printer ......................................................................... 17
Installation............................................................................................ 18
Power Cord Requirements ............................................................ 21
Setting Up The Printer ......................................................................... 21
Loading Ribbon ............................................................................. 22
Loading Roll Media ....................................................................... 25
Loading Fanfold Media.................................................................. 30
Operating Modes ................................................................................. 34
Controls And Indicators ....................................................................... 35
Power Switch ................................................................................ 35
Powering On The Printer............................................................... 35
Control Panel ................................................................................ 36
Media Handling Modes ........................................................................ 40
Printhead Pressure Adjustment ........................................................... 41
Media Thickness Adjustment ........................................................ 41
Media Width Adjustment ............................................................... 42
Printhead Alignment ...................................................................... 43
Positioning The Media Sensors ........................................................... 44
Sensing Different Media Types ..................................................... 46
Running Auto Calibrate........................................................................ 47
Running Media Profile ......................................................................... 48
Running Manual Calibrate ................................................................... 50
Table of Contents
3 Standard Interfaces............................................. 53
Overview.............................................................................................. 53
Auto Switching ..................................................................................... 53
Centronics Parallel Interface................................................................ 54
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals ............................................ 55
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface................................................................ 56
Compatibility Mode........................................................................ 56
Nibble Mode .................................................................................. 56
Byte Mode ..................................................................................... 56
Signals .......................................................................................... 57
RS-232 Serial Interface ....................................................................... 59
4 Configuring The Printer ....................................... 61
Overview.............................................................................................. 61
Setting Printer Configuration Parameters ..................................... 61
Moving Within The Configuration Menu ........................................ 61
Selecting A Menu Option .............................................................. 63
Hidden Menus...................................................................................... 63
Changing Printer Settings ............................................................. 64
Menu Overview.................................................................................... 65
Main Menu ........................................................................................... 66
MEDIA SETUP Menu .......................................................................... 68
MEDIA SETUP Submenus............................................................ 69
SENSOR SETUP Menu....................................................................... 83
SENSOR SETUP Submenus ........................................................ 84
EMULATION MENU ............................................................................ 90
Overview ....................................................................................... 90
EMULATION Submenus ............................................................... 96
PRINTER SETUP Menu .................................................................... 105
PRINTER SETUP Submenus ..................................................... 106
INTERFACE Menu ............................................................................ 115
INTERFACE Submenus.............................................................. 118
CONFIGURATION MENU ................................................................. 135
CONFIGURATION Submenus .................................................... 136
DIAGNOSTICS Menu ........................................................................ 138
DIAGNOSTICS Submenus ......................................................... 139
Saving A Configuration ...................................................................... 141
Auto Save Configuration.................................................................... 142
Specifying A Power-Up Configuration ............................................... 144
Modifying A Saved Configuration ...................................................... 145
Printing A Configuration..................................................................... 146
Loading A Saved Configuration ......................................................... 147
Table of Contents
5 Downloading Firmware ..................................... 149
Loading Flash Memory ...................................................................... 149
Downloading Printer Firmware Using
The Firmware Download Utility.......................................................... 150
Downloading Printer Firmware Through
The Parallel Or Serial Port Using DOS.............................................. 151
Downloading Printer Firmware If Flash Contains Corrupt Code........ 153
Downloading Printer Firmware Via The ftp Utility and
Printronix Network Interface Card...................................................... 154
Downloading Printer Firmware Through USB.................................... 156
Downloading Optional Fonts to Flash Memory.................................. 157
Download Optional Fonts Via The Parallel or Serial Port............ 158
Download Optional Fonts Via The Ethernet Using ftp................. 160
Labeling Applications......................................................................... 160
Using Downloaded TrueType Fonts .................................................. 160
Downloading TrueType Fonts............................................................ 161
Printronix Windows Driver ........................................................... 161
Create And Send Download File – Online (PGL Only)................ 162
Create And Send Download File – Download Mode ................... 162
Using PTX_SETUP ..................................................................... 163
6 Routine Care And Troubleshooting................... 165
Cleaning............................................................................................. 165
Exterior Cleaning......................................................................... 165
Interior Cleaning .......................................................................... 165
General Cleaning ........................................................................ 165
Cleaning The Printhead, Platen Roller And Media Sensors........ 166
Printer Tests ...................................................................................... 169
Troubleshooting Common Situations................................................. 169
Improving Processing Time......................................................... 169
Data Exchange............................................................................ 170
Controlling Print Quality............................................................... 171
Determining Printhead Wear ....................................................... 171
Replacing The Printhead ................................................................... 172
Restore The Printer To Operation ..................................................... 174
Solving Other Printer Problems................................................... 175
Printer Alarms ............................................................................. 181
Fault Messages ........................................................................... 181
Table of Contents
A Specifications .................................................... 205
Print Method................................................................................ 205
Media .......................................................................................... 206
Ribbon ......................................................................................... 208
Indicators And Switches .............................................................. 208
Memory ....................................................................................... 209
Optional Expanded Memory Cartridge ........................................ 209
Media Cutter Option .................................................................... 209
Host Interfaces ............................................................................ 210
Power .......................................................................................... 210
Environmental ............................................................................. 211
Physical ....................................................................................... 211
Acoustic Noise ............................................................................ 211
B Printer Options .................................................. 213
Hardware Options.............................................................................. 213
Interface Options ............................................................................... 214
Network Interface Card (NIC)...................................................... 214
Software Options ............................................................................... 214
Installing The EMC ............................................................................ 215
Using The Standard Peel Without Liner Rewinder ............................ 217
Configure The Printer Menu ........................................................ 217
Load Media ................................................................................. 217
Using The Full Media Rewinder Option ............................................. 219
Configure The Printer Menu ........................................................ 219
Load Media ................................................................................. 219
Rewinder Full Sensor Setup ....................................................... 221
Using The Standard Peel With Liner Rewinder Option...................... 222
Configure The Printer Menu ........................................................ 222
Load Media ................................................................................. 223
Removing Label Liner from the Rewinder ................................... 227
Supplies ............................................................................................. 228
Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons............................ 228
Genuine Printronix Media............................................................ 229
Ribbon And Media Usage ........................................................... 230
C ASCII Control Codes......................................... 231
Table of Contents
D General Information .......................................... 233
Printronix Customer Support Center.................................................. 233
Printronix Supplies Department................................................... 233
Corporate Offices ........................................................................ 234
Training Available On Printronix Products ......................................... 234
Warranty Information ......................................................................... 235
Communication Notices..................................................................... 236
Software License Agreement............................................................. 239
Limited Software Product Warranty ................................................... 241
E Glossary............................................................ 243
Table of Contents
1
Introduction
The SL4M/T4M Thermal Printer
NOTE: As used in this manual, the terms “SL4M/T4M” and “printer” refer to
all models within the series. “SL” refers to all SmartLine RFID models.
The SL4M/T4M series consists of a family of high quality, direct thermal and
thermal transfer printers specifically designed for printing labels and tags from
any MS-DOS®, Windows®, or ASCII based compatible computer.
The SL4M/T4M, Smart Ready, and SmartLine series are comprised of the
products detailed in Table 1.
NOTE: All models are RFID Ready.
Table 1. The SL4M/T4M Thermal Printer
Model
Max Print
Speed (ips)
Printing
Density (dpi)
Max Print
Width (inches)
SL4M/T4M
10
203
4.1
SL4M/T4M
10
305
4.1
Standard Features
•
•
•
•
•
Thermal Transfer and Direct Thermal Printing
•
Media capacity: Eight inch diameter roll media on three inch core
(203mm diameter on 76.2mm diameter core)
•
•
Fanfold media handling
Printheads: Snap-in, interchangeable 203 dpi and 305 dpi
Print speeds: Up to 10 ips (both 203 and 305 dpi)
Printing: On demand single label and batch label
Media sensing: Horizontal positioning for gap, notch, hole, or black mark
sensing.
Ribbon capacity: 450m on one inch core (4.5 µm ribbon thickness)
11
Chapter
1
The SL4M/T4M Thermal Printer
•
•
Standard Interfaces:
•
Serial: RS-232
•
USB 2.0 Universal Serial Bus
•
Parallel: Centronics®-compatible parallel, IEEE® 1284 compliant
parallel
Emulations:
•
Printronix IGP®/PGL®. Provides printer system commands for text,
barcodes, graphics, lines, and boxes.
•
ZGL Interpreter: ZebraTM
•
TGL Interpreter: TEC
•
IGL Interpreter: Intermec
•
STGL Interpreter: SATO
•
DGL Interpreter: Datamax
Interpreters are powerful integration tools that allows the SL4M/T4M
printer to function in virtually all legacy ZPLTM, TEC, IPL, SGL, and DGL
application environments without requiring modification to host data
stream.
•
•
Bar Codes: Supports over 30 types of bar codes.
Download: Fonts, forms, and graphics to printer memory.
The standard resident fonts are Letter Gothic Bold (#93779), Courier Bold
(#93952), CG Triumvirate Bold Condensed (#92250), OCR-A (#90993),
OCR-B (#91409), CG Triumverate (#92244), CG Triumverate Bold
(#92248), and CG Times (#92500). All other fonts are optional.
12
•
High Resolution Printhead: 203 dpi or 305 dpi for sharp graphics and
text.
•
•
•
32MB DRAM memory (fixed on controller PCBA)
•
Ventless System: for operation in environments with airborne particulate
matter without compromising performance.
8MB Flash memory (fixed on controller PCBA)
Expanded Memory Cartridge (EMC): provides an additional 32 MB of
Flash memory and can be installed by the user.
Optional Features
Optional Features
Ask your authorized representative about the following enhancement options:
•
Fonts: A selection of fonts is available to extend the capabilities of the
standard resident fonts.
•
Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder: In label peel-off mode, peels off
labels one at a time before printing the next label and rewinds the liner
into a discardable roll.
•
Full Media Rewinder: In batch rewind mode, rewinds printed labels into
a removable roll.
•
Label Taken Sensor: For detecting presence and removal of labels in
Peel-Off mode. Is included only with the Standard Peel without Liner
Rewinder or Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder options.
•
Standard Peel without Liner Rewinder: The Peel-Off mode peels labels
while discarding the dispensed liner in front of the printer.
•
Media Cutter: The cutter is used to automatically cut printed media when
the media exits the printer. See Appendix A on page 209.
•
Expanded Memory Cartridge (EMC): 32MB Expanded Memory
Cartridge that provides additional Flash memory for forms, logos, and
fonts. The EMC can be installed by the user.
•
Network Interface Card (NIC): This option allows you to attach the
printer to a LAN (Local Area Network) rather than attaching it directly to a
host computer.
NIC adapters are available as user installable option, mounted inside the
printer with the 10/100Base-T (UTP) connection only.
NOTE: In this manual, the terms “Network Interface Card” (or “NIC”) and
“Ethernet” are used interchangeably.
•
RFID encoder: The RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) encoder
programs smart labels (tags with embedded inlays).
•
Wireless NIC: This card provides wireless 802.11b/g connectivity without
expensive cabling and reconfigurations required from a wired network.
•
Real Time Clock: A clock chip with internal battery that keeps track of the
year, month, day, hour, minute, and second values. It continues to
operate when the printer is off.
For more information about printer options, see Appendix B on page 213.
13
Chapter
1
Thermal Printer Technology
Thermal Printer Technology
Quiet and fast, with excellent print quality, your multifunction thermal printer
uses an inline thermal printhead. The thermal printer operates differently from
a line matrix or laser printer, because the thermal printer uses a printhead with
heating elements and special paper or ribbon.
The Printing Process
The thermal printhead allows two modes of operation:
•
Direct Thermal
During direct thermal printing, the thermal printhead selectively heats
small, rectangular thermal dots. When these contact the coated thermal
paper, the dyes and developers in the coating react to the heat and
develop an image. This mode of printing is generally used for short-term
labeling applications.
•
Thermal Transfer
During thermal transfer printing, the heated thermal dots contact a
thermal ribbon. The heat reacts with the ribbon and bonds the image to
the paper. This method is used especially for abrasive, long-storage
applications and for specialized applications, such as in extreme
environmental conditions or where tamper-proofing is required.
Manual Conventions
•
Operator panel keys are often shown by their symbol or icon (located on
the control panel directly below the key).
Example: Press the ↵ key for ENTER.
•
LCD fault messages display the specific fault in uppercase letters.
A corrective action in upper and lowercase letters displays below the fault
message.
Example: PAPER OUT
Load Paper
•
Key combinations are indicated by the + (plus) symbol.
Example: Press the Up key + Down key at the same time.
14
Warnings AndThe
Special
Information
Printing
Process
Warnings And Special Information
For your safety and to protect valuable equipment, read and comply with all
information highlighted under special headings:
WARNING
CAUTION
IMPORTANT
Conditions that could harm you and damage the equipment.
Conditions that could damage the printer or related equipment.
Information vital to proper operation of the printer.
NOTE: Information and helpful tips about printer operation.
Related Documents
•
Quick Setup Guide — Explains how to unpack, install, and set up the
printer.
•
Maintenance Manual — Explains how to maintain and repair the line
matrix printer at the field service level of maintenance.
•
IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides information used
with the optional IGP Printronix emulation enhancement feature.
•
Printer Protocol Interpreter ZGL™ Programmer’s Reference Manual —
Provides information for the printer to function in the legacy ZPL
application environment without requiring modification to host data
stream.
•
Printer Protocol Interpreter TGL™ Programmer’s Reference Manual —
Provides information for the printer to function in the legacy TEC
application environment without requiring modification to host data
stream.
•
Printer Protocol Interpreter IGL™ Programmer’s Reference Manual —
Provides information for the printer to function in the legacy IPL
application environment without requiring modification to host data
stream.
•
Printer Protocol Interpreter STGL™ Programmer’s Reference Manual —
Provides information for the printer to function in the legacy SGL
application environment without requiring modification to host data
stream.
•
Printer Protocol Interpreter DGL™ Programmer’s Reference Manual —
Provides information for the printer to function in the legacy DGL
application environment without requiring modification to host data
stream.
•
PXML Application Developer Reference Manual — Provides information
for printers to be managed remotely by a management model.
•
Network Interface Card User's Manual — Information about network
protocols, configuration, and operation.
15
Chapter
1
Thermal Consumables
•
Remote Management Software User’s Manual — Information about the
remote management software utility which allows you to organize all of
the printers in your office remotely in a single database, download
software and printer settings from a host computer with a single mouse
click.
•
XML Direct for Oracle Quick Start Guide — Explains the use of the XML
language with the Printronix® SL4M/T4M XML Direct printer.
•
XML Direct for SAP Quick Setup Guide — Explains the use of the XML
language with the Printronix SL4M/T4M XML Direct printer.
•
RFID Label Reference Manual — Explains the use of the Printronix
SL4M/T4M printer and RFID label application.
Thermal Consumables
Media Selection
Since there are two print modes of operation, there are two kinds of thermal
media:
•
•
Direct thermal media
Thermal transfer media
Direct thermal media is paper coated with special chemicals that act as an
accelerator, acceptor dye, and binder. During direct thermal mode, the heat
from the thermal printhead contacts the paper, causing a chemical reaction
which results in a printed image.
Thermal transfer media requires ribbon. A wide range of Printronix thermal
transfer media is available, such as film or synthetic paper substitutes. Most
of these media options can be die-cut for easy label applications. The wide
selection of media sizes and face stocks have been tested with Printronix
ribbons for print quality and usage. Consult your Genuine Printronix Supplies
Catalog, call the Printronix Customer Solutions Center at (714) 368-2686, or
access the Printronix web page at www.printronix.com.
NOTE: The term “media” used in this manual refers to all the different kinds
of label or tag stock that can be used in the printer.
See “Genuine Printronix Media” on page 229 for more information.
Ribbons
Printronix offers a wide range of ribbons specifically engineered to enhance
printing capabilities and to prevent premature printhead wear. Therefore, you
should use a Genuine Printronix Thermal Ribbon in your printer.
See “Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons” on page 228 for more
information.
16
2
Operation
Unpacking The Printer
The printer is shipped in a carton and protective bag. The top lid of the carton
has instructions for removing the internal packing material. Keep all packing
material in case repacking is required.
CAUTION
Avoid touching the electrical connectors to prevent electrostatic
discharge damage while setting up the printer. The discharge of
accumulated electrostatic energy can damage or destroy the printhead
or electronic components used in this device.
Packing Material (4)
Accessories
Plastic Bag
Lifting Strap (2)
Printer
Shipping Container
17
Chapter
2
Installation
1. Place the shipping container upright on a flat, level surface.
2. Open the box and remove the first layer of packing material along with
any lose items.
3. Remove the accessories box and set it aside.
4. Pull the printer out of the shipping container by using the two plastic
straps as handles.
5. Remove the bands and plastic bag.
6. Check that all components on the packing list are included.
Installation
The following sections will guide you through the printer installation process.
1. Place the printer on a flat level surface that allows easy access to all sides
of the printer.
CAUTION
Never operate the printer on its side or upside down.
2. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
WARNING
Failure to properly ground the printer may result in electric shock to the
operator.
In compliance with international safety standards, this printer has been
equipped with a three-pronged power cord. When inserted in a correctly
wired power outlet, the ground conductor will ensure that the printer
chassis is at ground (earth) potential. Do not use adapter plugs or
remove the grounding prong from the cable plug. If an extension cord is
required, ensure that a three-wire cable with a properly grounded plug is
used.
3. Attach the AC power cord to the AC power receptacle in the back of the
printer.
4. Attach the AC power cord to a grounded (three prong) electrical outlet of
the proper voltage. See “Power Cord Requirements” on page 21.
5. Attach Communication Interface:
a. Parallel Interface
Attach a suitable parallel printer cable from the computer to the
Centronics/IEEE 1284 interface connector at the back of the printer.
Snap the bail locks to the Centronics connector to secure the
interface cable to the printer.
b. Serial Interface
Attach a suitable serial printer cable from the computer to the DB-9
RS-232 serial interface connector at the back of the printer. For
additional information on serial cable wiring, refer to “Routine Care
And Troubleshooting” on page 165.
18
Installation
c.
USB
Attach a USB cable with noise suppresion filters on BOTH ends from
the computer to the USB connector at the back of the printer.
NOTE: The printer supports simultaneous connection of the parallel, serial,
and USB interfaces using the Auto Switching feature. Auto Switching
is described on page 53.
d. NIC Connection
Insert a suitable NIC cable from your hub or switch to the NIC
connector located in the I/O panel in the rear of your printer.
Interface Panel with Ethernet Option
Ethernet Interface
(optional)
Parallel Interface
USB Connection
Serial Interface
RS-232
19
Chapter
2
Installation
Wireless Interface Panel
Wireless
Antenna
Wireless
Interface
20
Power Cord Requirements
Power Cord Requirements
In compliance with international safety standards, this printer is equipped with
a three-pronged electrical plug on the power cord. When this power cord is
plugged into a correctly wired power outlet, the ground conductor ensures that
the printer chassis is at ground (earth) electrical potential.
WARNING
Failure to properly ground the printer can result in electrical shock to
the operator.
Never use adapter plugs without grounding prong. Never remove the
grounding prong from the power cable plug. If using an extension cord,
make sure it is a three-wire cable with a properly grounded plug.
Setting Up The Printer
NOTE: This section describes the procedures for loading various types of
ribbon and media. You can also refer to instructions on the printer
itself, on a label on the inside of the media cover.
The term “media” in this manual refers to all the different kinds of paper, label,
or tag stock material that can be printed on by the printer. Your thermal printer
can print on continuous paper, adhesive backed labels, or non-adhesive tags
packaged in roll or fanfold form.
IMPORTANT
For best results, use only genuine Printronix supplies. See “Supplies”
on page 228.
CAUTION
DO NOT TOUCH the printhead or the electronic components under the
pivoting deck. The discharge of electrostatic energy that accumulates
on the surface of the human body or other surfaces can damage or
destroy the printhead or electronic components used in this device.
CAUTION
Do not close the pivoting deck without label stock installed between the
printhead and the platen, because debris on the platen may damage the
printhead.
CAUTION
Avoid touching the electrical connectors while setting up the printer to
prevent electrostatic discharge damage. The discharge of accumulated
electrostatic energy can damage or destroy the printhead or electronic
components used in this printer.
IMPORTANT
Adhesive backed labels that DO NOT lay flat on the liner can jam the
printer. This can cause the label to peel off the liner. The exposed edges
can stick to the label guides and rollers inside the printer.
If you run out of labels while printing, do not turn off the printer while
reloading labels, because you can lose data.
21
Chapter
2
Setting Up The Printer
Loading Ribbon
For direct thermal media (no ribbon required), go to page 25.
Media Cover
Flange
Ribbon
Take-Up Core
Ribbon
Take-Up Spindle
Ribbon
Roll
Ribbon
Supply Spindle
Deck Lock Lever
Pivoting
Deck
IMPORTANT
Clean the printhead, platen roller, and media sensor every time you
change the ribbon. See “Cleaning The Printhead, Platen Roller And
Media Sensors” on page 166.
1. Raise the media cover.
2. Install the ribbon take-up core on the ribbon take-up spindle.
NOTE: The first ribbon take-up core comes with the printer. Thereafter, move
the empty core from the ribbon supply spindle to the take-up spindle
after the ribbon is used up.
3. Slide the ribbon roll onto the ribbon supply spindle until it is flush with the
flange.
4. Open the pivoting deck and printhead by rotating the deck lock lever fully
counterclockwise until the deck and printhead swing upward.
22
Loading Ribbon
Ribbon Take-Up
Core
Ribbon
Take-Up Spindle
Ribbon
Supply Spindle
Printhead
Alternate Ribbon
Path
Ribbon
Platen (not shown)
Ribbon Guide
Roller (2)
5. Thread the end of the ribbon under the ribbon guide rollers, between the
platen (rubber drive roller) and the printhead, and between the ribbon
take-up and supply spindles.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the ribbon behind the ribbon take-up spindle.
NOTE: The alternate ribbon path is for inside ink ribbon.
23
Chapter
2
Setting Up The Printer
Ribbon
Take-up Core
Ribbon
Take-up Spindle
Ribbon Leader
Deck Lock Lever
Printhead
Pivoting Deck
IMPORTANT
Never attach the ribbon to the ribbon take-up spindle without a ribbon
take-up core installed.
6. Attach the ribbon to the ribbon take-up core on the ribbon take-up spindle
with tape.
7. Manually rotate the take-up spindle counterclockwise until the ribbon
leader has passed the printhead.
8. Rotate the deck lock lever fully clockwise to close the pivoting deck, and
attached printhead.
24
Loading Roll Media
Loading Roll Media
Media Cover
Media Hanger
Media Hanger
Guide
Pivoting Deck
Deck Lock Lever
IMPORTANT
If you are using direct thermal mode, clean the printhead, platen roller,
and lower media sensor every time you change the media. See
“Cleaning The Printhead, Platen Roller And Media Sensors” on
page 166.
1. Slide the media hanger guide outward to the end of the media hanger
(as shown).
2. Remove and dispose of any empty media core.
3. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully
counterclockwise.
25
Chapter
2
Setting Up The Printer
Side Wall
Media Roll
Media Hanger
Guide
Media Hanger
4. Place the media roll onto the media hanger and slide the media roll until it
is flush with the printer’s side wall.
NOTE: For information regarding smart labels, refer to the RFID Labeling
Reference Manual.
5. Slide the media hanger guide against the media roll to prevent horizontal
travel, but make sure the media roll can rotate freely.
26
Loading Roll Media
Printhead
Platen
(not shown)
Media Sensor
Assembly
Media
Width Guide
Blue Locking
Knob
Media Damper
Media
Alternate
Media Path
6. Thread the media under the media damper, through the media sensor
assembly, and then between the platen (rubber drive roller) and the
printhead.
NOTE: If you have the standard peel option, batch label rewinder, or peelliner rewinder, see “Using The Standard Peel Without Liner
Rewinder” on page 217,
“Using The Full Media Rewinder Option” on page 219, or
“Using The Standard Peel With Liner Rewinder Option” on page 222
for proper threading instructions.
NOTE: The alternate media path is for inside wound label media.
CAUTION
If the blue media width guide locking knob is too loose or is removed,
the media width guide will fall off the printer.
7. Turn the blue media width guide locking knob counterclockwise just
enough to slide the media width guide, and no more.
8. Position the media width guide lightly against the outside edge of the
installed media and tighten the blue locking knob by turning it clockwise.
27
Chapter
2
Setting Up The Printer
Media
(left edge)
Inside Media
Edge Guide
Media Sensor Assembly
9. Check the horizontal position of the media sensor assembly
(see “Positioning The Media Sensors” on page 44).
10. Align the left (inside) edge of the media with the inside media edge guide.
28
Loading Roll Media
Pivoting Deck
Deck Lock
Lever
11. Rotate the deck lock lever fully clockwise to close the pivoting deck.
This locks the pivoting deck and printhead into print position.
IMPORTANT
Ensure the printhead is down and locked before attempting to advance
media or print. Failure to do so will cause the “PRINT HEAD UP Close
Print Head” fault message to display.
12. Verify that Print Mode in the printer configuration menu is set for the
media type installed (Direct or Transfer). The Print Mode submenu is
located in the MEDIA SETUP menu. See “MEDIA SETUP Menu” on
page 68 for details.
13. Verify the Gap/Mark Sensor selection matches the type of media
installed. See “Sensing Different Media Types” on page 46.
•
If you have not run an Auto Calibrate, do so now. See “Running Auto
Calibrate” on page 47.
•
If you have already run an Auto Calibrate, complete the following
steps:
a. Close the media cover.
29
Chapter
2
Setting Up The Printer
b. Press the
advances.
c.
Press the
(Feed) key once to verify that the media
(Pause) key to place the printer online.
Loading Fanfold Media
Media Cover
Fanfold
Media
Media
Hanger Guide
Media Hanger
Deck Lock
Lever
Pivoting Deck
Bottom Panel
Opening
Media Damper
1. Open the media cover.
2. Slide the media hanger guide outward to the end of the media hanger.
3. Place the fanfold media either behind or beneath the printer, depending
on the desired fanfold supply location. Insert the first few labels through
either the rear or bottom panel opening.
4. Place the media over the media hanger, flush against the back of the
printer.
5. Slide the media hanger guide against the outer edge of the fanfold media
to prevent horizontal travel.
6. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully
counterclockwise until the deck and printhead swing upward.
30
Loading Fanfold Media
Media Sensor
Handle
Locking Knob
Media
Damper
Media Sensor
Assembly
Media Width
Guide
Platen
7. Thread the media under the media damper, through the media sensor
assembly, and then between the platen (rubber drive roller) and the
printhead. You can also refer to the label inside the media cover for media
loading instructions.
CAUTION
If the media width guide locking knob is too loose or is removed, the
media width guide will fall off the printer.
8. Turn the media width guide locking knob counterclockwise just enough to
slide the media width guide, and no more.
9. Position the metal guide lightly against the outside edge of the installed
media and tighten the locking knob by turning it clockwise.
10. Check the horizontal position of the media sensor assembly
(see “Positioning The Media Sensors” on page 44).
31
Chapter
2
Setting Up The Printer
Media
(left edge)
Inside Media
Edge Guide
11. Align the left (inside) edge of the media with the inside media edge guide.
32
Loading Fanfold Media
Pivoting Deck
Deck Lock
Lever
12. Close the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise.
IMPORTANT
Ensure the pivoting deck is down and locked before attempting to
advance media or print. Failure to do so will cause the “PRINT HEAD UP
Close Print Head” fault message to display.
13. Verify that Print Mode submenu is set for the media type installed (direct
or transfer). The Print Mode submenu is located in the MEDIA SETUP
menu. See “Main Menu” on page 66 for more information. Also, if thermal
transfer media is installed, see “Loading Ribbon” on page 22.
14. Verify the Gap/Mark Sensor selection matches the type of media
installed. See “Sensing Different Media Types” on page 46.
33
Chapter
2
Operating Modes
For direct thermal operation (no ribbon required) or thermal transfer
operation (ribbon required):
•
If you have not run an Auto Calibrate, do so now. See “Running Auto
Calibrate” on page 47.
•
If you have already run an Auto Calibrate, complete the following
steps:
a. Close the media cover.
b. Press the
advances.
c.
Press the
(Feed) key once to verify that the media
(Pause) key to place the printer online.
NOTE: When changing to Online mode, if the operator has changed menu
items, but not saved the changes in a configuration, the operator will
be prompted to save the changes.
Operating Modes
The current operating mode can be selected through the control panel keys or
can result from routine operations such as powering on the printer.
Online: In online mode, the printer can receive and print data sent from the
host. Pressing the Pause key toggles the printer between the online and
offline modes. The ONLINE status indicator is lit green in online mode.
Offline: In offline mode, you can perform operator functions such as loading
media or changing ribbon. Pressing the Pause key toggles the printer from
offline to online mode. The ONLINE status indicator is not illuminated in offline
mode.
Menu: Pressing the MENU key takes the printer offline and into Menu mode.
In this mode, you can navigate through all configuration and status menus
and change the printer configuration.
Fault: In fault mode, a fault condition exists that must be cleared before
printing can continue. The FAULT status indicator flashes red, the alarm
beeps (if configured to do so), and a descriptive fault message displays. The
ONLINE status indicator turns off.
The fault must be corrected first and then the message cleared by pressing
the Pause key before normal printing can continue.
34
Power Switch
Controls And Indicators
Power Switch
The power switch is located on the bottom front panel of the printer. To apply
power, place the switch in the | (On) position. When you first power on the
printer, a series of initialization messages will appear on the LCD (Liquid
Crystal Display) on the control panel.
To remove power, place the power switch in the O (Off) position.
Powering On The Printer
When you power on the printer, it executes a self-test. During the self-test, the
LCD momentarily displays the DPI resolution (203 or 305 DPI) of the installed
printhead. The default power-on state is online. Once the printer has
successfully initialized, the ONLINE status indicator light illuminates, and the
LCD indicates ONLINE, the printer model (SL4M/T4M), the printhead installed
(203 or 305 dpi), the communication interface, and the emulation selected.
If there is a fault during the self-test, the FAULT (!) status indicator flashes,
and a fault message appears on the display. The alarm may also sound, if
configured to do so.
35
Chapter
2
Controls And Indicators
Control Panel
The control panel is located on the front of the printer and includes an LCD,
indicators, and control keys (buttons).
LCD (Liquid
Crystal Display)
Online Indicator
Fault Indicator
Pause Key
Feed Key
Up Key
Enter Key
Menu Key
Cancel Key
NOTE: Press the Down
and ↵ (Enter) keys at the
same time to lock or
unlock the ↵ key.
Left Key
Down Key
Right Key
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
A backlighted LCD that will display up to four rows of 16 characters each or
eight rows of 21 characters each.
Pause Key
The Pause key toggles the printer between Online and Offline Modes.
The key performs the following in Online, Offline, Fault, and Menu modes:
•
•
•
Online Mode – sets the printer to Offline Mode.
•
Menu Mode – sets the printer to Menu Mode.
Offline Mode – sets the printer to Online Mode.
Fault Mode – causes the printer to recheck the faults; if the faults have
been cleared, the printer toggles to the Offline mode.
NOTE: When changing to Online mode, if the operator has changed menu
items, but not saved the changes in a configuration, the operator will
be prompted to save the changes.
36
Control Panel
Feed Key
The Feed Key advances the media one label length in Online and Offline
Mode. If there is data in the printer, the printer will print the data before
ejecting the label. This key is inactive in all other modes.
Menu Key
In Online, Offline, or Fault modes, the Menu key causes the printer to enter
the Menu mode and the top level menu icons to display. In Menu mode, the
Menu key will move to the first Icon position in the top level Icon menu. This
key is inactive in all other modes.
Cancel Key
If enabled, the Cancel key clears all data in the printer data buffer in Offline
mode. In Menu mode, this key moves up to the previous higher level menu.
↵ Enter Key
•
In Menu mode (at the icon menu level): pressing the Enter key will move
down into the menu tree for the highlighted icon.
•
Within a menu tree: if the highlighted menu contains submenus instead of
a selectable parameter, pressing the Enter key will move down into the
submenus of that menu. If the highlighted menu is a display only menu
then pressing the Enter key performs no function. If the highlighted menu
has selectable parameters, pressing the unlocked Enter key will select
the displayed parameter. An asterisk (*) displays next to the selected
parameter.
If the highlighted menu is an executable menu, pressing the unlocked
Enter key will cause the function associated with the executable menu to
run. If the Enter key is locked, pressing the Enter key for highlighted
menus that are executable or contain selectable parameters will cause a
momentary display of THE ↵ KEY IS LOCKED message.
NOTE: Press the Down and ↵ key at the same time to lock/unlock the ↵ key.
For special Network Address menus or String menus, pressing the Enter
key will move down into a special multiple segment setting menu. Exit this
menu by pressing Enter again to save the changes or Cancel to exit
without saving the changes. This key is inactive in all other modes.
37
Chapter
2
Controls And Indicators
Up Key
In Menu mode (at the icon menu level), this key will move to the next row of
icons. If on the bottom row it will move up the top row of icons. If at the top of
the menu tree, pressing the Up key will go to the bottom of the menu tree.
Within each menu, this key will scroll to the previous submenu in the menu
tree.
If in special multiple segment setting menus for Network Address menus or
string menus, pressing the Up key will increment the segment or character
value. If at the top of the segment or character value range, pressing the Up
key will go to the bottom of that value range.
This key is inactive in all other states. This key is typematic and if held down
will start to accelerate.
Down Key
In Menu mode (at the icon menu level), this key will move to the next row of
icons. If on the top row it will move to the bottom row of icons. If at the bottom
of the menu tree, pressing the Down key will go to the top of the menu tree.
Within each menu, this key will scroll to the next submenu in the menu tree.
If in special multiple segment setting menus for Network Address menus or
String menus, pressing the Down key will decrement the segment or
character value. If at the bottom of the segment or character value range,
pressing the Down key will go to the top of that value range.
This key is inactive in all other states. This key is typematic and if held down
will start to accelerate.
Right Key
In Offline mode, this key adjusts the display brightness of the LCD. In Menu
mode (at the icon menu level), this key will advance from one menu icon to
the next menu icon. If at the end of one row of icons it will move to the
beginning of the other row of icons.
Within a menu tree, if the highlighted menu has a selectable parameter,
pressing the Right key causes the parameter to increment or display the next
parameter on the list. If at the top of the parameter range, pressing the Right
key will move to the bottom of the parameter range.
If in special multiple segment setting menus for Network Address menus or
String menus, pressing the Right key will move to the next segment or
character without losing changes made to the current segment or character.
If at the end of the segments or characters, pressing the Right key will go to
the beginning of the segments or characters. None of the changes to the
segments or characters will take affect until the Enter Key is pressed.
This key is inactive in all other states. This key is typematic and if held down
will start to accelerate.
38
Control Panel
Left Key
In Offline mode, this key adjusts the display brightness of the LCD. In Menu
mode (at the icon menu level), this key will advance from one menu icon to
the previous menu icon. If at the beginning of one row of icons it will move to
the end of the other row of icons.
Within a menu tree, if the highlighted menu has a selectable parameter,
pressing the Left key causes the parameter to decrement or display the
previous parameter on the list. If at the bottom of the parameter range,
pressing the Left key will move to the top of the parameter range.
If in special multiple segment setting menus for Network Address menus or
String menus, pressing the Left key will move to the previous segment or
character without losing changes made to the current segment or character.
If at the begining of the segments or characters, pressing the Left key will go
to the end of the segments or characters. None of the changes to the
segments or characters will take affect until the Enter Key is pressed.
This key is inactive in all other states. This key is typematic and if held down
will start to accelerate.
Combination Keys
•
Menu Unlock Combo Key
A combination key whose default setting is the Enter and Down keys
pressed simultaneously. In Menu mode, this key toggles locking and
unlocking of the Enter key. This key is inactive in all other modes. When
the Enter key is locked it prevents the operator from modifying the menu
settings. The default is the Enter and Down keys.
NOTE: To change the default menu lock/unlock combo keys to a different
key or combination, select PRINTER SETUP
Set Lock Key.
Admin User must be enabled for the Set Lock Key option to display.
•
Soft Reset Combo Key
A combination key that causes the printer to perform a soft reset by
pressing the Left and Right keys simultaneously in Offline and Menu
modes. This combo key is inactive in all other modes.
•
Download Combo Key
A combination key that places the printer in download mode. See
“Downloading Printer Firmware Using The Firmware Download Utility” on
page 150.
Online Indicator
Indicates when the printer is online or offline. The online indicator stays lit
when the printer is online, ready to print and blinks while accepting data from
the host.
(!) Fault Indicator
Flashes during a fault condition.
39
Chapter
2
Media Handling Modes
Media Handling Modes
Before you load media, you must decide which media handling mode to use:
•
Tear-Off Strip (factory default). Printer prints on the media and sends it
out the front until the print buffer is empty, then positions the last label
over the tear bar for removal.
•
•
Continuous. Prints on the media and sends it out the front of the printer.
Peel-Off. Prints and peels die-cut labels from the liner without assistance.
The printer waits for you to take away the label before printing the next
one (on-demand printing). Supported only when Standard Peel or
Peel-Liner Rewinder option is installed. When either option is installed
with liner attached, a “Remove Label” message will display to remind you
to remove the label before the next one can be printed.
NOTE: This mode is only supported when the Standard Peel without Liner
Rewinder option or Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder option is
installed.
NOTE: If the Peel-Off option is not installed, the error message “OPTION
NOT INSTALLED” displays. Requires the Standard Peel with or
without Liner Rewinder options to be installed.
•
Cut. When the optional media cutter is installed, it automatically cuts
media after each label is printed or after a specified number of labels
have been printed when a software cut command has been issued. It cuts
continuous roll paper, labels, or tag stock.
NOTE: The Cut option is not allowed if the cutter is not installed. The error
message “OPTION NOT INSTALLED” displays.
•
Rewind. In rewind mode the printer unwinds the media from the media
supply roll or fanfold label stack, prints the labels, and rewinds the printed
media and its carrier web onto the optional rewind spindle. For the
optional Rewinder, use “Rewind” for Batch Rewind mode (see “Using The
Full Media Rewinder Option” on page 219).
NOTE: “OPTION NOT INSTALLED” displays if the Full Media Rewinder
option is not installed.
Once you have decided on the mode, configure the printer. See Chapter 4 for
more information.
40
Media Thickness Adjustment
Printhead Pressure Adjustment
Media Thickness Adjustment
A
Indicator
Window
A
Printhead
Pressure
Switch (blue)
Metal Tab
Printhead Balance
Adjustment Dial
This procedure adjusts the printhead pressure to accomodate media of
different thicknesses. This will minimize printhead wear and optimize print
quality. The printhead pressure switch has two positions, high and normal.
Follow this procedure to adjust the media thickness:
1. Rotate the printhead balance adjustment dial until “A” appears in the
indicator window (see Detail A above).
NOTE: The dial must be set to “A”. If you have the dial set to a numerical
value, you cannot slide the printhead pressure switch.
2. Slide the printhead pressure switch to NORMAL or HIGH depending on
the media thickness (see Table 2). Make sure to slide the blue printhead
pressure switch completely to either side of the metal tab.
Table 2. Media Thickness Adjustment
Media
Setting
Inches
Millimeters
Thin paper, normal label, etc.
NORMAL
0.003 to 0.008
0.076 to 0.200
HIGH
0.008 to 0.010
0.200 to 0.254
Thick paper, tag stock, etc.
3. Adjust the media width by rotating the printhead balance adjustment dial
to the appropriate setting (see page 42). Do not leave the dial in the “A”
position.
41
Chapter
2
Printhead Pressure Adjustment
Media Width Adjustment
B
3
Indicator
Window
B
Printhead Balance
Adjustment Dial
Media width adjustment allows you to vary printhead pressure along the
platen from one end to the other. If the printhead pressure is out of balance,
the printed image will be darker on one side of the label than the other and the
media will travel in the direction with the least resistance.
The printhead balance adjustment dial is scaled in numerals to help you
balance adjustment based on the width of the media. The balance shown in
the indicator window is the active setting.
1. Determine the correct value based on the media width (see Table 3).
Table 3. Printhead Balance Adjustment Ranges
Printhead
Balance Dial
Setting
Paper Width
A
1 to 2
2 to 4
4 to 5
N/A (Used to adjust
the printhead
pressure switch only.
See page 41)
1.00 to 2.16 inches
(25mm to 55mm)
2.16 to 3.15 inches
(55mm to 80mm)
3.15 to 5.15 inches
(80mm to 131mm)
2. Rotate the printhead balance adjustment dial until the correct value
appears in the indicator window (see Detail B above).
42
Printhead Alignment
Printhead Alignment
Align the printhead under the following conditions: to improve the print quality
when running difficult media with major differences in thickness, when
adjusting for media thickness (with the printhead pressure switch) did not
yield adequate print quality, or when you replace the printhead.
The printhead must be parallel with the platen for consistent image printing
across the label. If the printhead is misaligned, labels will print with uneven ink
distribution (i.e. splotches and fading ink). When you align the printhead, you
are moving the printhead forward and backward in relation to the platen.
A
Deck Lock
Lever
Printhead
Alignment Dial
A
Pivoting Deck
Tool Clip
Printhead
Alignment Tool
1. Raise the media cover.
2. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully
counterclockwise.
43
Chapter
2
Positioning The Media Sensors
3. Remove the printhead alignment tool (yellow screwdriver) from the tool
clip.
4. Use the printhead alignment tool to turn the printhead alignment dial.
Turn the printhead alignment dial UP for THICKER stocks and DOWN for
THINNER stocks.
5. Close the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise.
6. Run a print test, such as the checkerboard or gray scale.
See “Print Tests” on page 139.
7. If necessary repeat steps 4 to 6 until the desired alignment is achieved.
8. Lower the media cover.
Positioning The Media Sensors
Your printer is equipped with a media sensor assembly that detects the
top-of-form position on media with label length indicators (gaps, notches,
holes, or black marks). These sensors also detect when a Paper Out
condition exists.
See page 207 for media and label length indicators.
The media sensors should not be placed in the path of media features that
could cause false gap detection or paper out faults. Such features are dark
pre-printing, rounded die-cut label corners, vertical gaps associated with
side-by-side labels, and extraneous cut-outs, as shown below.
Dark Pre-printing
Position the media
sensors in either of
the grey shaded
areas.
Extraneous Cut-out
Vertical Gap and
Rounded Die-cut
Label Corners
44
PositioningPrinthead
The Media
Sensors
Alignment
Media Sensor
Assembly
Mark Sensor Indicator
(both sides)
Gap Sensor Indicator
(both sides)
Media Sensor
Handle
Media
Sensing Media with Horizontal Black Marks or Inboard
Notches
1. Use the media sensor handle to horizontally position the media sensor
assembly so that the sensor indicators (embossed on both sides) are
aligned with the reference marks on the media.
2. Select Mark in the Gap/Mark Sensor submenu under the SENSOR
SETUP menu. See “Sensing Different Media Types” on page 46.
NOTE: If using media with shallow notches, i.e. notches that are cut short
where the media sensor cannot be adjusted to detect the notch, be
sure to select Mark in the Gap/Mark Sensor submenu under
SENSOR SETUP menu. For Mark sensing, the ribbon must be
loaded, see “Loading Ribbon” on page 22.
3. Perform an Auto Calibrate. See “Running Auto Calibrate” on page 47.
Sensing Media with No Label Length Indicators
1. When using media without label length indicators (no gaps, notches,
holes, or marks) or when you want to ignore all existing length indicators,
place the media sensor in the center of the media so it can detect when a
Paper Out condition exists.
2. Select Disable in the Gap/Mark Sensor submenu under SENSOR
SETUP. See “Sensing Different Media Types” on page 46.
3. Perform an Auto Calibrate. See “Running Auto Calibrate” on page 47.
45
Chapter
2
Positioning The Media Sensors
Sensing Media with Gapped Liner
1. Use the media sensor handle to horizontally position the media sensor
assembly so that the sensor indicators (embossed on both sides) are
aligned with the reference marks on the media.
2. Select Gap in the Gap/Mark Sensor submenu under the SENSOR
SETUP menu. See “Sensing Different Media Types” on page 46.
3. Perform an Auto Calibrate. See “Running Auto Calibrate” on page 47.
Sensing Different Media Types
The printer’s media sensors can detect the different types of label length
indicators on a large variety of media types. This is accomplished by selecting
the correct sensor option: Gap, Mark, or Disable under Gap/Mark Sensor in
the SENSOR SETUP menu. Figure 5 on page 207 illustrates the different
media types and label length indicators used on them.
1. Press
..
.
to place the printer in Menu mode.
2. Press the Down + ↵ (Enter) keys together until “THE ↵ KEY IS
UNLOCKED” displays.
3. Press the Right key until SENSOR SETUP displays.
4. Press ↵ to enter the SENSOR SETUP.
5. Press the Down key until Gap*/Mark Sensor/Disable (the currently
enabled) option displays.
6. Press Left or Right keys until the option that matches the type of label
length indicators on the installed media displays:
•
Mark. Select when using media that has horizontal black marks
located on the underside of the label liner or tag stock or narrow width
inboard notches.
•
Gap. Select when using media with a liner space between die-cut
labels or when using tag stock with holes or wide inboard notches as
label length indicators on white background media.
•
Disable. Select when using media with no label length indicators (no
gaps, notches, holes, or black marks) or when you want the printer to
ignore all existing label length indicators on the installed media.
NOTE: When you select Disable, the length of each label is based on the
Label Length value entered in the MEDIA SETUP menu or the value
sent via host software.
7. Press ↵ to enable the displayed option. An asterisk (*) appears next to
the selection.
8. Run Auto Calibrate (see to page 47).
9. Press Pause until OFFLINE appears on the LCD.
46
Auto
Calibrate
SensingRunning
Different
Media
Types
Running Auto Calibrate
You can initiate Run Auto-Cal (Auto Calibrate) via the the SENSOR SETUP
menu.
NOTE: Verify that the Gap/Mark Sensor option (Gap, Mark, or Disable)
matches the installed media. See “Sensing Different Media Types” on
page 46.
Check that the media sensors are horizontally positioned to permit
sensing of the label length indicators. See “Positioning The Media
Sensors” on page 44.
If Use Label Length is enabled in the SENSOR SETUP menu, make
sure the Label Length value entered in the MEDIA SETUP menu
matches the physical length of the installed media. Entering the
correct length forces the printer to advance media far enough during
calibrate for long labels (so actual gaps and marks can be detected).
If you try to do an Auto Calibrate when Peel-Off Media Handling is
enabled, the LCD will display “CANNOT CALIBRATE/Disable PeelOff.” Before you can do an Auto Calibrate, you must select another
media handling mode or enable the Cal in Peel mode option under
the SENSOR SETUP menu. Cal in Peel Mode displays only if Admin
User is Enabled under the PRINTER SETUP menu.
1. Press
..
.
to place the printer in Menu mode.
2. Press Down + ↵ (Enter) keys together until “THE ↵ KEY IS UNLOCKED”
displays.
3. Press the Right key until SENSOR SETUP displays.
4. Press ↵ to enter the SENSOR SETUP menu.
5. Press Down key until Run Auto-Cal displays.
6. Press ↵ to select the option. Media advances until it can accurately detect
the label length indicators and then stops at the Top-of-Form position.
The Sensed Distance value will then display for one second.
7. Auto Calibrate is successful when the Sensed Distance value correctly
matches that of the installed media:
•
Gap/Mark Sensor = Gap: The Sensed Distance value is the physical
length of one label plus the length of one gap, notch, or hole.
•
Gap/Mark Sensor = Mark: The Sensed Distance value is the
physical distance from the trailing edge of one black mark to the
trailing edge of the next.
•
Gap/Mark Sensor = Disable: Not applicable. If Gap/Mark Sensor is
set to Disable, the Sensed Distance value will not be updated.
If “GAP NOT DETECTED” displays, run auto calibrate again.
If auto calibrate continues to end with an incorrect Sensed Distance value
displayed or a fault message displayed, run Manual Calibrate as
described on page 50 or see Table 15 on page 182.
47
Chapter
2
Running Media Profile
NOTE: The amount of media sampled during Auto Calibrate is based on the
length of a label and transitions detected, without error, between a
label and its label length indicators.
8. Press the
(Pause) key until OFFLINE displays.
9. Press the
(Feed) key several times. Each time you press Feed, the
media advances one label length and stops.
NOTE: After a form feed, the position of the leading edge of the next label
depends on the type of Media Handling mode selected under the
MEDIA SETUP menu. Tear-Off Strip Media Handling will position the
label edge at the tear bar, while Continuous will position the label
edge under the printhead.
10. Press the
(Pause) key until ONLINE displays.
NOTE: When changing to Online mode, if the operator has changed menu
items, but not saved the changes in a configuration, the operator will
be prompted to save the changes.
11. Once the correct Top-Of-Form (TOF) sensing is confirmed, you will need
to save it to the desired configuration menu before powering off the
printer. See “Saving A Configuration” on page 141.
Running Media Profile
The Media Profile printout shows the relationship of the Paper Out Threshold
and the Gap/Mark Threshold values, illustrates if and when each label length
indicator is detected, and shows the difference between the label length
indicators and the label. The profile printout (see Figure 1 on page 49) helps
you set the thresholds for difficult media. This includes pre-printed labels and
labels with poor gap/media dynamic range.
Once Media Profile is initiated, the printer will continue to advance media and
print the profile in landscape orientation until you press ↵ to stop printing.
NOTE: Verify the SENSOR SETUP menu Gap/Mark Sensor option (Gap,
Mark, or Disable) matches the installed media. See “Sensing
Different Media Types” on page 46.
You will need a minimum installed label width of two inches to support
the Profile printout.
Ensure the media sensors are horizontally positioned to permit
sensing of the label length indicators. See “Positioning The Media
Sensors” on page 44.
Ensure the Print Mode option selected in the MEDIA SETUP menu
matches the media installed. Select Direct for heat sensitive media
(no ribbon required) or Transfer for thermal transfer media (ribbon
required).
1. Press
..
.
to place the printer in Menu mode.
2. Press the Down + ↵ (Enter) keys together until “THE ↵ KEY IS
UNLOCKED” displays.
3. Press the Right key until SENSOR SETUP displays.
48
Sensing Running
Different Media
Media Profile
Types
4. Press ↵ to enter the SENSOR SETUP menu.
5. Press the Down key until Run Profile displays and then press ↵.
(The printer will continue to print the profile until you press ↵.)
The printer will advance media and continue to print a dynamic profile
image depicting the relationship of the label and any label length
indicators detected.
6. Press ↵. The printer will stop printing.
7. Press the Pause key until OFFLINE displays.
NOTE: The Gap/Mark and Paper Out Threshold values shown on the Profile
printout represent the last values determined from a successful Auto
or Manual Calibrate or the factory default values if no Auto or Manual
Calibrate was performed.
Label Feed Direction
255
191
Paper Out(167)
127
Gap (109)
063
000
Figure 1. Media Profile Printout
In Figure 1, the tent shapped pulse immediately following the liner gap shows
that the gap was easily detected. A very low amplitude pulse may be due to a
dirty sensor or low contrast media where there is very little opacity difference
between the label and the liner gap.
49
Chapter
2
Running Manual Calibrate
Running Manual Calibrate
Manual Calibrate should be performed only when the values derived from
Auto Calibrate fail to improve the media sensors’ ability to sense label length
indicators on the installed media. You must first enable Admin User in the
PRINTER SETUP menu before accessing or initializing Run Manual Cal
(manual calibrate) in the SENSOR SETUP menu.
NOTE: Verify the Gap/Mark Sensor option (Gap, Mark, or Disable) matches
the installed media. See “Sensing Different Media Types” on page 46.
Ensure the media sensors are horizontally positioned to permit
sensing of the label length indicators. See “Positioning The Media
Sensors” on page 44.
Ensure the Print Mode option selected in the MEDIA SETUP menu
matches the media installed. Select Direct for heat sensitive media
(no ribbon required) or Transfer for thermal transfer media (ribbon
required).
If you try to do a Manual Calibrate when Peel-Off Media Handling is
enabled, the LCD will display, CANNOT CALIBRATE/Disable
Peel-Off. Before you can do a Manual Calibrate, you must select
another media handling mode or enable the Cal in Peel Mode option
under the SENSOR SETUP menu. Cal in Peel Mode displays only if
Admin User is enabled under the PRINTER SETUP menu.
1. Press
..
.
to place the printer in Menu mode.
2. Press the Down + ↵ (Enter) keys together until “THE ↵ KEY IS
UNLOCKED” displays.
3. Press the Right key until PRINTER SETUP displays.
4. Press ↵ to Enter the PRINTER SETUP menu.
5. Press Up key until Admin User displays, then press the Right key until
until Enable displays.
6. Press ↵ to select Enable. An asterisk (*) appears next to Enable.
7. Press
..
.
to go back to the Main menu.
8. Press the Right key until SENSOR SETUP displays.
9. Press ↵ to Enter the SENSOR SETUP menu.
10. Press Down key until Run Manual Cal displays, then press the ↵.
11. Follow the instructions displayed on the LCD. Example: “REMOVE
MEDIA/Press Enter” indicates that you must open the pivoting deck and
remove the ribbon and media from under the printhead, close and lock
the pivoting deck, and press the ↵ key.
NOTE: When requested to load an item make sure to place the item in a
position where the media sensor can detect the item. for example,
when requested to “LOAD MARK” place the Mark (Black TOF Line) at
the media sensor.
50
Running
Manual
Calibrate
Sensing
Different
Media
Types
12. During the last step of Run Manual Cal, the printer advances the media
and attempts to detect the label length indicators and stop at the
Top-of-Form position. The Sensed Distance value will then display for
one second. The calibrate is successful when the Sensed Distance value
correctly matches that of the installed media. If “CALIBRATION FAIL/See
Manual” displays, run a manual calibrate again.
NOTE: The amount of media sampled during manual calibration is based on
the length of a label and the transitions detected without error,
between a label and its label length indicators.
13. Press the
(Pause) key until OFFLINE displays.
14. Press the
(Feed) key several times. Each time you presss
media advances one label length and stops.
the
NOTE: After a form feed, the position of the leading edge of the next label
depends on the type of Media Handling mode selected under the
MEDIA SETUP menu. Tear-Off Strip Media Handling positions the
label edge at the tear bar, while Continuous positions the label edge
under the printhead.
15. Once the correct values are confirmed, save them to the desired
configuration menu before powering off the printer. See “Saving A
Configuration” on page 141.
51
Chapter
52
2
Running Manual Calibrate
3
Standard Interfaces
Overview
This chapter describes the host interfaces provided with the printer. The
printer interface is the point where the data line from the host computer plugs
into the printer. The interface processes all communications signals and data
to and from the host computer. Plus, with the Auto Switching feature, you can
configure the printer to accept several interfaces at the same time.
In addition to descriptions for the multi-line interfaces, this chapter also
provides instructions for configuration of terminating resistors for the parallel
and serial interfaces.
Auto Switching
This feature gives the printer the ability to handle multiple data streams
sequentially. With Auto Switching, the printer can service hosts attached to
the serial, parallel, USB, or Ethernet as if they were the only interface
connected.
For example, if the host computer sends one print job to the RS-232 serial
port and a separate print job to the IEEE 1284 parallel port, the printer's Auto
Switching will handle both jobs, in the order they were received, without the
user having to reconfigure the selected interface between jobs.
Standard Host Interfaces
•
•
•
•
Centronics parallel
IEEE 1284 parallel bidirectional port
RS-232 Serial Port
USB 2.0 Universal Serial Bus
Optional Host Interfaces
•
•
Ethernet 10/100Base-T
Wireless NIC
53
Chapter
3
Centronics Parallel Interface
Centronics Parallel Interface
Table 4. Centronics Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals
Output Signals
Miscellaneous
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
DATA LINE 1
Return
2
20
ACKNOWLEDGE
Return
10
28
CHASSIS GROUND
17
DATA LINE 2
Return
3
21
ONLINE
Return
13
28
GROUND
30
DATA LINE 3
Return
4
22
FAULT
Return
32
29
Spares
14
DATA LINE 4
Return
5
23
PAPER EMPTY
Return
12
28
No Connection
34,35,
36
DATA LINE 5
Return
6
24
BUSY
Return
11
29
+5 Volts
18
DATA LINE 6
Return
7
25
DATA LINE 7
Return
8
26
DATA LINE 8
Return
9
27
DATA STROBE
Return
1
19
PAPER INSTRUCTION
Return
15
29
PRIME
Return
31
30
NOTE: The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer
must not exceed 15 feet (5 meters).
54
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals
Table 5. Centronix Parallel Interface Signals
Signals
Purpose
Data Lines 1 through 8
Provide eight standard or inverted levels from
the host that specify character data, plot data,
or a control code. Data Line 8 allows access to
the extended ASCII character set. You may
enable or disable this line via the Data Bit 8
parameter on the Centronics Parallel submenu.
Data Strobe
Carries a low true, 100 ns minimum pulse from
the host that clocks data into the printer.
Acknowledge
A low true pulse from the printer indicating the
character or function code has been received
and the printer is ready for the next data
transfer.
Online
A high true level from the printer to indicate the
printer is ready for data transfer and the Pause
key on the control panel has been activated.
When the printer is in online mode, it may
accept data from the host.
Paper Empty (PE)
A high true level from the printer to indicate the
printer is in a paper empty or paper jam fault.
Busy
A high true level from the printer to indicate the
printer cannot receive data.
Prime
A high true level from the host to indicate the
printer should perform a warm start (printer is
reset to the power-up configuration values).
Paper Instruction (PI)
Carries a VFU signal from the host with the
same timing and polarity as the data line.
Fault
A low true level from the printer indicates a
printer fault.
55
Chapter
3
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface
The IEEE 1284 supports three operating modes, which are determined by
negotiation between the printer and the host.
Compatibility Mode
This mode provides compatibility with Centronics-like host I/O (see Table 4).
Data is transferred from the host to the printer in 8-bit bytes over the data
lines.
Compatibility Mode can be combined with Nibble and Byte Modes to provide
bidirectional communication.
Nibble Mode
Eight bits equals one byte. When a byte of data is sent to the printer, the eight
bits are sent over eight data lines.
Some devices cannot send data over their eight data lines. To bypass this,
the IEEE 1284 permits data to be sent as half a byte over four status lines.
(Half a byte equals one nibble.) Two sequential four-bit nibbles are sent over
the lines.
Data is transferred from printer to host in four-bit nibbles over the status lines,
and the host controls the transmission.
Byte Mode
The printer and host send data to each other along eight data lines (one bit
per line).
If bidirectional communication is supported by the printer and the host, the
host will take control of the data transfer.
56
Signals
Signals
Table 6 lists each of the signals associated with the corresponding pins on the
IEEE 1284 interface. Descriptions of the signals follow.
Table 6. IEEE 1284 Signals
Type of Mode
Pin
Source of Data
Compatible
1
Host
nStrobe
2
Host/Printer
Data 1 (LSB)
3
Host/Printer
Data 2
4
Host/Printer
Data 3
5
Host/Printer
Data 4
6
Host/Printer
Data 5
7
Host/Printer
Data 6
8
Host/Printer
Data 7
9
Host/Printer
Data 8 (MSB)
10
Printer
11
Nibble
Byte
HostClk
Host/Clk
nAck
PtrClk
PtrClk
Printer
Busy
PtrBusy
PtrBusy
12
Printer
PError
AckDataReq
AckDataReq
13
Printer
Select
Xflag
Xflag
14
Host
nAutoFd
Host Busy
HostAck
15
Not Defined
16
Logic Grid
17
Chassis Grid
18
Printer
Peripheral Logic High
19
Signal Ground (nStrobe)
20
Signal Ground (Data 1)
21
Signal Ground (Data 2)
22
Signal Ground (Data 3)
23
Signal Ground (Data 4)
24
Signal Ground (Data 5)
25
Signal Ground (Data 6)
57
Chapter
3
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface
Table 6. IEEE 1284 Signals (continued)
Type of Mode
Pin
Source of Data
Compatible
Nibble
Byte
26
Signal Ground (Data 7)
27
Signal Ground (Data 8)
28
Signal Ground (PError, Select, nAck)
29
Signal Ground (Busy, nFault)
30
Signal Ground (nAutoFd, nSelectIn, nInit)
31
Host
nInit
32
Printer
NFault
33
Not Defined
34
Not Defined
35
Not Defined
36
Host
nSelectIn
nDataAvail
aDataAvail
1284 Active
1284 Active
NOTE: The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer
should not exceed 32 feet (10 meters).
Host Clock / nWrite. Driven by the host. Data is transferred from the host to
the printer. When the printer sends data, two types are available. If it is Nibble
Mode, the signal is set high. If it is Byte Mode, the signal is set low.
Data 1 through Data 8. These pins are host-driven in Compatibility Mode and
bidirectional in Byte Mode. They are not used in Nibble Mode. Data 1 is the
least significant bit; Data 8 is the most significant bit.
Printer Clock / Peripheral Clock / Interrupt. Driven by the printer. A signal
from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received
and the printer is ready for the next data transfer.
Printer Busy / Peripheral Acknowledge / nWait. Driven by the printer.
Indicates the printer cannot receive data. (Data bits 4 and 8 in Nibble Mode.)
Acknowledge Data Request / nAcknowledge Reverse. Driven by the
printer. Indicates the printer is in a fault condition. (Data bits 3 and 7 in Nibble
Mode.)
Xflag. Driven by the printer. A high true level indicating the printer is ready for
data transfer and the printer is online. (Data bits 2 and 6 in Nibble Mode.)
Host Busy / Host Acknowledge / NDStrobe. Driven by the host. Activates
auto-line feed mode.
Peripheral Logic High. Driven by the printer. When the line is high, the
printer indicates all of its signals are in a valid state. When the line is low, the
printer indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state.
58
RS-232 Serial Interface
Signals
nReverse Request. Driven by the host. Resets the interface and forces a
return to Compatibility Mode idle phase.
nData Available / nPeripheral Request. Driven by the printer. Indicates the
printer has encountered an error. (Data bits 1 and 5 in Nibble Mode.)
1284 Active / nAStrobe. Driven by the host. A peripheral device is selected.
Host Logic High. Driven by the host. When set to high, the host indicates all
of its signals are in a valid state. When set to low, the host indicates its power
is off or its signals are in an invalid state.
nInit. Resets init interface from the host.
RS-232 Serial Interface
NOTE: The RS-232 serial interface circuit characteristics are compatible with
the Electronic Industry Association Specification EIA®-232-E.
The RS-232 serial interface enables the printer to operate with bit serial
devices that are compatible with an RS-232 controller. The input serial data
transfer rate (in baud) is selectable from the printer's control panel. Baud rates
of 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 are
available.
The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not
exceed 50 feet (15 meters) for RS-232
Table 7. RS-232 Serial Interface Connector (9 Pin) Assignments
Input Signals
Output Signals
Miscellaneous
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Receive Data (RXD)
2
Transmit Status & Control
Data (TXD)
3
Chassis/Signal Ground
5
Clear To Send (CTS)
8
Request To Send (RTS)
7
Data Set Ready (DSR)
6
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
4
Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
1
Received Data (RXD). Serial data stream to the printer.
Transmitted Data (TXD). Serial data stream from the printer for transmitting
status and control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection.
Request To Send (RTS). Control signal from the printer. Subject to
configuration.
Clear To Send (CTS). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ready
to receive data/status signals from the printer.
Data Set Ready (DSR). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is in a
ready condition.
59
Chapter
3
RS-232 Serial Interface
Data Carrier Detect (DCD). Status signal to the printer. The ON condition is
required for the printer to receive data.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR). Control signal from the printer. Subject to
configuration.
60
4
Configuring The Printer
Overview
This chapter provides information about:
•
•
Setting, saving, modifying, and printing configurations
Configuration menus
Setting Printer Configuration Parameters
Configuration parameters are set from the control panel or are retrieved from
the printer’s memory. The parameters define how the printer will respond to
command and interface signals from the host computer.
The configuration menu structure consists of main menus and the options
applicable to each menu.
NOTE: Some configurations refer to printer options that may not be present
in your printer. If you select an option or feature that is not present, no
action will be performed by the printer or an “OPTION NOT
INSTALLED” message will display on the LCD.
Moving Within The Configuration Menu
You can navigate through the configuration menus using the appropriate
navigation keys, as shown in Figure 2. (See “Controls And Indicators” on
page 35 for more details on the function of the operator panel keys.)
You can select different options and save them as the power on default;
however, you can only save them to configuration menus 1-8. The factory
configuration menu can be altered, but not saved.
When the printer is online, the first line of the LCD displays “ONLINE” and the
second line lists the active interface port and emulation type.
To configure the printer:
1. Press the ... key to enter the printer menu system. Eight menu icons
display on the LCD. The MEDIA SETUP icon is selected (highlighted).
2. You can move through configuration main menus in two ways:
•
Press the right key to move right or the left key to move left.
•
Press the down key to move down or the up key to move up between
menu icons displayed within each column.
61
Chapter
4
Overview
NOTE: In menus with numeric ranges of more than 50 numbers, hold down
the right or left key for more than 2 seconds to move through the
range in increments of 5. To move in increments of 1 again, release
your hold on the right or left key.
Step
Press
LCD
1
2
3
4
Notes
OFFLINE
DOWN Key+
↵
..
.
↵
↵
Unlocks the ENTER
key to allow you to
make configuration
changes.
THE
KEY IS
UNLOCKED
MEDIA SETUP
Enters the printer
menus.
MEDIA SETUP
Print Intensity:
Enters the MEDIA
SETUP Menu.
-3*
5
DOWN Key UNTIL
Print Mode:
Transfer*
6
7
8
LEFT Key or
RIGHT Key
Print Mode:
↵
Print Mode
Print Mode is
selected.
Direct
Cycles through the
choices.
Direct*
Selects the Direct
transfer mode.
MEDIA SETUP
Print Intensity:
In Menu mode, this
key moves up to the
previous higher level
menu.
Figure 2. Moving within the Configuration Menu
62
Selecting A Menu Option
Selecting A Menu Option
To select an option, you need to press the ↵ key. By default, however, the
↵ key is “locked” when the printer is turned on to prevent accidental changes
to the configuration menu. If you press the ↵ key when the key is locked, the
message “The ↵ KEY IS LOCKED” displays on the LCD for one second and
the value will not be selected.
To unlock the ↵ key, press the Down + ↵ (Enter) keys simultaneously (if the
combination keys have not been otherwise reconfigured). This toggles the
ENTER/LOCK function.
•
If this function is performed while the ↵ key is locked, the message
“The ↵ KEY IS UNLOCKED” displays for one second, and the ↵ key will
be unlocked.
•
If this function is performed while the ↵ key is unlocked, the message
“The ↵ KEY IS LOCKED” displays for one second, and the ↵ key will be
locked.
When you press the ↵ key (with the ↵ key unlocked), you select the value or
option that displays. An asterisk displays after the value you selected, and the
configuration is changed immediately.
IMPORTANT
This change takes effect for all subsequent data and operations for the
printer as soon as the ↵ key is pressed and the asterisk (*) is displayed.
The configuration change(s) stay in effect only while the printer is
powered on. When the power is turned off, all current configurations will
be lost unless changes made to it are saved via the CONFIGURATION
menu. To save configuration information permanently or to select it as
the power-up default, see “Saving A Configuration” on page 141.
When you make a menu change and attempt to go Online without saving
the changes to a configuration, you will be prompted to save the
changes (provided that Auto Save is set to Enable in the
CONFIGURATION MENU). For more information on Auto Save
Configuration, see page 142.
Hidden Menus
By default, menu items for advanced users are hidden (they do not appear in
the menu structure). To display these hidden menus:
1. Press
to enter Menu mode.
2. Press the Down and ↵ keys at the same time until THE ↵ KEY IS
UNLOCKED displays.
3. Press the Right key until
4. Press ↵ to enter the
PRINTER SETUP displays.
PRINTER SETUP menu.
5. Press the Up key until Admin User displays.
6. Press the Right key until Enable displays.
7. Press ↵ to select it. An asterisk (*) displays after Enable. The hidden
menus will now appear.
63
Chapter
4
Hidden Menus
Changing Printer Settings
You can change (or “configure”) printer settings, such as print speed or
emulations, through the control panel as follows:
1. Press the
selected.
..
.
key to enter the Menu configuration. MEDIA SETUP is
2. Press the ↵ key to enter the MEDIA SETUP menu. Print Intensity is
selected.
3. Press the Down key to cycle through these options:
•
Print Intensity
•
Print Speed
•
Print Mode
•
Media Handling
•
Tear Off Adjust
•
Label Length
•
Label Width
•
Ver Image Shift
•
Hor Image Shift
•
Orientation
•
Units
4. When the desired submenu is selected, press the Left or Right keys to
scroll through the values or options.
5. Press the ↵ key to select a value. An asterisk (*) displays next to the
selected value or option.
6. If there are more submenu values or options you want to change, use the
..
. ,Up, Down, Left, and Right keys to access the value and the ↵ key
to select it. At any time, you may press the ... key to return to the Main
menu.
7. At any time, you may press the Pause key twice to exit the Configuration
menu and place the printer online. Once you have finished selecting all
your options, save your configuration.
IMPORTANT
64
If you do not save your configuration, all your new values will be lost
when you power off the printer. See “Saving A Configuration” on
page 141 and “Auto Save Configuration” on page 142.
Menu Overview
Changing Printer
Settings
Menu Overview
MEDIA
SETUP
Control various
parameters related to
print quality, media, and
ribbon.
INTERFACES
Set host interfaces.
SENSOR
SETUP
Select the correct
media sensing for the
media type installed
and perform media
sensor calibration.
Select the desired
Active IGP emulation,
other emulations, and
various printer
operating parameters.
Set the menus needed
to configure the
printer.
CONFIGURATION
DIAGNOSTICS
Name, store, and retrieve up
to eight custom printer
configurations.
Select various printer
tests, monitor and record
printer performance.
RFID
Setup and status
reporting for RFID
encoder if installed.
PRINTER
SETUP
EMULATION
Press
..
.
to select the next main menu.
Press the Up or Down keys to move within each main menu.
65
Chapter
4
Main Menu
Main Menu
MEDIA
SETUP
(page 68)
Print Intensity
Print Speed
Print Mode
Media Handling
Adv Continuous
Tear Off Adjust
Label Length
Label Width
Ver Image Shift
Hor Image Shift
Orientation
Auto Map Select
Auto Label Width
Num Auto Labels
Slew Speed Ctrl
Slew Speed 6
Print Direction
Tear-Strip Time
Label Missing
Clip Page
Fault Reprint
Display Ribbon
Ribbon Low
Units
Set Label Length
TOF Detect Fault
TOF Adjust Mode
TOF Adjust
SENSOR
SETUP
(page 83)
Gap/Mark Sensor
Run Auto-Cal
Run Profile
Sensed Distance
Gap/Mark Thresh
Paper Out Thresh
Run Manual Cal
Pwr up Auto-Cal
Head Auto-Cal
Online Auto-Cal
Gap Windowing
Gap Length
Cal in Peel Mode
Min Calib Delta
Use Label Length
Threshhold Range
Mark TOF Detect
EMULATION
(page 90)
Select
Emulation Setup
NOTES:
Italicized items are available only Admin User is set to Enable (in the
PRINTER SETUP menu).
1 This
menu appears only if the RFID option is installed.
2
This menu appears only if the RFID option is not installed and a CST (Character
Sequence Table) file is loaded.
3
This menu appears only if an EMC (Expanded Memory Cartridge) is installed.
4 This
menu appears only if the real time clock option is installed.
5
Updates the set parameters only if the real time clock option is installed.
6
This menu appears when Slew Speed Ctrl is set to Manual (in the MEDIA SETUP
menu).
66
PRINTER
SETUP
(page 105)
SMT: Status 1
PAA: Status 2
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Display Language
Alarm
Power-up State
PTX Setup Parse
Ptx Setup SFCC
Cancel Key
Compatibility
Ret. Status Port
Del Char frm Fls
Ld char from Fls
Save Char to Fls
Del Char frm RAM
Ld Char at PwrUp
Del Set frm Fls
Ld Set from Fls
Save Set to Fls
Del Set from RAM
Ld Set at PwrUp
Main FFS
EMC FFS 3
Optimize&Reboot
Print File List
Auto Locking
Set Lock Key
Max Font Buffer
Max Cache Memory
Max Cached Char
Standard Chars.
Bold Chars.
Extra Bold Char.
OCR-A Chars.
OCR-B chars.
Tall Characters
Batch Counter
Date 4, 5
Disp. Intensity
Admin User
Main
Menu
Changing Printer
Settings
INTERFACE
(page 115)
Host Interface
Ethernet Port
Ethernet Setting
WLAN Setting
Parallel Port
USB Port
Serial Port
Printer Mgmt
RFID
Refer to the RFID
Labeling Reference
Manual.
CONFIGURATION
DIAGNOSTICS
(page 135)
(page 138)
Save Config.
Load Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Config 1
Name Config 2
Name Config 3
Name Config 4
Name Config 5
Name Config 6
Name Config 7
Name Config 8
Reset cfg Names
Auto Save
Printer Tests
Test Count
Software Build
Feature File 1
Hex Dump Mode
Print Error Log
Clear Error Log
FLASH Installed
EMC FLASH Installed 2
DRAM Installed
Ptr On Time
Printer Usage
PrintHead Usage
Head On Time
Reset Head Data
Head Resolution
Head Voltage
NOTES:
Italicized items are available only when you enable
Admin User in the PRINTER SETUP menu.
1
This menu only appears if Feature File is loaded.
2 This
menu only appears only if the EMC is installed.
67
Chapter
4
MEDIA SETUP Menu
MEDIA SETUP Menu
MEDIA
SETUP
(from page 66)
Print Intensity
0*
-15 to 15
Print Speed
Print Mode
4 ips*
1 ips to 10 ips
Label Length
6 inches* 1
0.1 to 99.0 inches
Label Width
Label Missing
In Inches*
In Millimeters
Set Label
Length
Manual*
Automatic
Standard*
Tear-Off
Tear Strip Full
Enable*
Disable
TOF Detect
Fault
3 Labels*
9 Labels
1 Label
0.00*
-0.50 to 0.20
Orientation
0.00 inches* 1
-1.00 to 1.00
Portrait*
Landscape
Inv. Portrait
Inv. Landscape
Automatic*
Manual
Clip Page
Tear Off
Adjust
Hor Image
Shift
Slew Speed
Ctrl
2 labels*
1 to 40 labels 6
1.0 seconds*
Fault Disable*
00.1 to 60.0 seconds Fault Enable
Units
Tear-Off Strip*
Peel-Off
Cut
Rewind
Continuous
0.00 inches 1
-1.00 to X 2
Num Auto
Labels
4.1, 6.6, or 8.5 inches* 1, 6
00.1 to 8.5 inches 3
Adv
Continuous
Ver Image
Shift
4.1 inches * 1
0.1 to 4.1 inches
Auto Label
Width
Tear-Strip
Time
Transfer*
Direct
Media
Handling
Slew Speed 5
4 ips*
1 to 10 ips 3
Fault Reprint
Enable*
Disable
TOF Adjust
Mode
TOF Adjust
Disable*
Enable
Disable*
Enable
Print Direction
Head First*
Foot First
Display Ribbon
Disable*
Enable
Auto Map
Select
Ribbon Low
Disable*
Enable
0.00 to 0.40 inches 4
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER SETUP menu.
1
You can change the unit value from inches to millimeters under Units (in MEDIA SETUP) when Admin User is set to
Enable (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
2
Based on the current value setting for Label Length (in the MEDIA SETUP menu) up to a maximum of 12.80 inches.
3 Maximum
value depends on the amount of DRAM available for page memory, label length, and label width
(see Appendix A, “Specifications”).
4
In increments of 0.01 inch.
5 This
6
68
menu appears when Slew Speed Ctrl is set to Manual (in the MEDIA SETUP menu).
Maximum value depends on the width of the printer model (see Appendix A, “Specifications”).
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
Print Intensity
This option specifies the level of thermal energy from the printhead to be used
for the type of media and ribbon installed.
Large numbers imply more heat (thermal energy) to be applied for each dot.
This has a significant effect on print quality. The print intensity and speed
must match the media and ribbon type to obtain the best possible print quality
and barcode grades.
The range is -15 to 15.
The factory default is 0.
Print Speed
This option specifies the speed in inches per second (ips) at which the media
passes through the printer while printing.
The range is 1 to 10 ips (in increments of 1 ips).
The factory default is 4 ips.
Print Mode
This option specifies the type of printing to be done.
•
Transfer (factory default). Indicates Thermal Transfer printing (ribbon
installed).
•
Direct. Indicates Direct Thermal printing (no ribbon) and requires special
heat sensitive media.
Media Handling
This option specifies how the printer will handle the media (labels or tag
stock).
•
Tear-Off Strip (factory default). Printer prints on the media and sends it
out the front until the print buffer is empty, then positions the last label
(cross perforation following) over the tear bar for removal.
•
Peel-Off. Prints and peels die-cut labels from the liner without assistance.
The printer waits for you to take away the label before printing the next
one (on-demand printing). Supported only when Standard Peel or
Peel with Liner Rewinder option is installed. When either option is
installed, a “Remove Label” message will display to remind you to remove
the label before the next one can be printed.
NOTE: If the Peel-Off option is not installed, the error message “OPTION
NOT INSTALLED” displays. Requires the Standard Peel without
Liner Rewinder or Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder option. Not
allowed if the options are not installed.
69
Chapter
4
MEDIA SETUP Menu
•
Cut. When the optional media cutter is installed, it automatically cuts
media after each label is printed or after a specified number of labels
have been printed when a software cut command has been issued. It cuts
continuous roll paper, labels, or tag stock.
NOTE: The Cut option is not allowed if the cutter is not installed. The error
message “OPTION NOT INSTALLED” displays.
•
Rewind. In rewind mode the printer unwinds the media from the media
supply spindle or fanfold label stack, prints the labels, and rewinds the
printed media and its carrier web onto the optional rewind spindle.
NOTE: The Batch Label Rewinder option is not allowed if the Rewinder is not
installed. The error message “OPTION NOT INSTALLED” displays.
•
Continuous. Printer prints on the media until the print buffer is empty and
then stops at the next top of form.
Adv Continuous
Allows selection of special media modes when Continuous Media Handling
mode (see page 69) is selected.
•
Standard (factory default). Labels are printed and sent out the front. The
cross perforation following the last printed label is not aligned at the tear
bar. No auto feeding of a blank label should exist between print jobs, but
you may need to press the Feed key to move approximately .80 inches of
the last printed label from under the printhead. If performed, this feed
causes a blank label at the beginning of the next print job.
•
Tear-Off. Same as Standard, but the cross perforation following the last
printed label is aligned at the tear bar. No blank label is needed to remove
the last printed label. No blank label should exist between print jobs. A no
print zone, .80 inches long, exists from the leading edge of each printed
label. This option supports label lengths 2.50 inches or longer.
•
Tear Strip Full. Same as Standard, but the cross perforation following
the last printed label is automatically aligned at the tear bar once the print
buffer is empty for a period of Tear-Strip Time. (Media does not get
aligned at tear bar until Tear-Strip Time expires.) When printable data is
again detected, a blank label is automatically fed, resulting in one blank
label between each print job. This option supports label lengths 2.50
inches or longer. Shorter label lengths cause two or more blank labels to
be automatically fed at the beginning of each print job.
Tear Off Adjust
This option represents the distance to advance (+ shift) or pull back (– shift)
the stop position of a label when Tear-Off Strip, Peel-Off, or Cut media
handling option is enabled. The allowable range is -0.50 inches to + 0.2
inches, in .01 inch increments.
The factory default is 0.00 inches.
70
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
Label Length
This option specifies the user-selected Label Length in inches or millimeters.
In most applications, the user-selected Label Length will match the physical
label length. Physical label length is the actual label length of the media
installed.
When setting label length, consider the following:
Label Length can also be manually entered via the control panel MEDIA
SETUP menu or sent via host computer using the appropriate software
command.
A Host Forms Length (Label Length) value sent from the host computer will
override and change the manually entered Label Length value in the MEDIA
SETUP menu.
•
Physical Label Length is the actual measurable length of the label. The
following list of different media types explains how the physical label
lengths are determined:
•
Die-cut labels – measurable length of the removable label (leading
edge to trailing edge). This does not include the liner material or gap.
•
Tag Stock with notches or holes – measurable length from the trailing
edge of one notch or hole to the leading edge of the next notch or
hole.
•
Tag Stock with black marks on underside – measurable length from
the trailing edge of one black mark to the trailing edge of the next
black mark.
NOTE: The printer can be configured to detect the leading edge of the black
mark using the Mark TOF Detect option in the SENSOR SETUP
menu.
•
•
Continuous media (no label length indicators) – measurable length
should be within + 1-2% the Label Length value entered in the MEDIA
SETUP menu, or the value sent via host software command.
Logical Label Length (Host Forms Length) is the length that a user or
programmer bases his printable image on. In most cases this length
should be slightly less than the Physical Label Length. This allows the
entire image to be printed within the boundaries of the label length
indicators (gaps, notches, holes, or black marks).
When the Logical Label Length is greater than the Physical Label Length
and Clip Page = Enable (in the MEDIA SETUP menu), the printer will clip
the bottom portion of the image that exceeds the Physical Label length. In
this case, the printable data that was not printed will be lost.
When the Logical Label Length is greater than the Physical Label Length
and Clip Page = Disable, the printer will continue to print the image onto
the next physical label and ignore the gap or mark based on the label
length value set in the MEDIA SETUP menu.
When the Logical Label Length is less than the Physical Label Length, the
printer will print the entire image and leave blank the remaining length of
the physical label as it advances to the Top-of-Form of the next label. This
is true regardless of the Clip Page setting.
71
Chapter
4
MEDIA SETUP Menu
The allowable Label Length range is 00.1 to 99.0 inches (2.5 - 2514.6mm).
The factory default is 6 inches. Maximum Label Length range is dependent on
the Label Width value selected, printhead installed (203 or 305 DPI).
NOTE: See “Set Label Length” on page 81.
Label Width
This option specifies the physical width of the image to be printed. The value
can be specified in inches or millimeters depending on the setting of the Units
submenu under the MEDIA SETUP menu. The allowable range in inches is
0.1 to 4.1 inches. The allowable range in millimeters is 2.5 to 104 mm.
Ver Image Shift
This option specifies the amount to shift an image vertically up (-) toward the
leading edge or down (+) toward the trailing edge for precise positioning on
the label. The actual height of the image is not affected by this parameter. The
allowable range is -1.00 inches to the current Label Length value setting, up
to a maximum of 12.80 inches, in .01 inch increments.
The factory default value is 0.00 inches.
Hor Image Shift
This option specifies the amount to shift an image horizontally outboard (-) or
inboard (+) for precise positioning on the label. The actual width of the image
is not affected by this parameter. The allowable range is -1.00 to +1.00 inches
in .01 inch increments.
The factory default value is 0.00 inches.
4 inches
FEED
6 inches
(+) A (-)
Leading Edge
72
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
Orientation
This menu item selects the image orientation to be used when printing the
label.
•
Portrait. Portrait refers to vertical page orientation, where the height of a
page is greater than its width. The top edge of the image is parallel to the
leading edge of the media. The following illustration is an example, with
the operator viewing the front of the printer.
NOTE: Portrait orientation applies to the PGL emulation. This is regarded as
Inverse Portrait using ZGL.
4 inches
FEED
6 inches
The top edge of
the image is
parallel to the
leading edge of
the media.
Leading Edge
•
Landscape. Landscape refers to horizontal orientation, where the width
of a page is greater than its height. The top edge of the image is the left
edge of the media. The following illustration is an example, with the
operator viewing the front of the printer.
NOTE: Landscape orientation applies to the PGL emulation. This is regarded
as Inverse Landscape using ZGL.
4 inches
The top edge of
the image is
parallel to the left
edge of the media.
FEED
6 inches
Leading Edge
73
Chapter
4
MEDIA SETUP Menu
•
Inv. Portrait. Inverse Portrait refers to vertical page orientation, where the
height of a page is greater than its width. The top edge of the image is
parallel to the trailing edge of the media. The following illustration is an
example, with the operator viewing the front of the printer.
NOTE: Inverse Portrait orientation applies to the PGL emulation. This is
regarded as Portrait using ZGL.
Trailing Edge
4 inches
FEED
The top edge of
the image is
parallel to the
trailing edge of the
media.
6 inches
Leading Edge
•
Inv. Landscape. Inverse Landscape refers to horizontal orientation,
where the width of a page is greater than its height. The top edge of the
image is the right edge of the media (the left edge of the image is the
trailing edge of the media). The factory default is Portrait. The following
illustration is an example, with the operator viewing the front of the printer.
NOTE: Inverse Landscape orientation applies to the PGL emulation. This is
regarded as Landscape using ZGL.
4 inches
The top edge of
the image is
parallel to the right
edge of the media.
FEED
Leading Edge
74
6 inches
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
Auto Map Select
This option specifies the maximum print width to be used by the application.
The IGP/Auto Label Mapping® feature allows backward compatibility of
programs written for P5000 line-matrix printers using the Printronix PGL
graphics language. It allows the printer to print two-up (or other multi-up)
labels. Instead of printing multiple labels across the printer, it prints the
leftmost label and the rightmost label, so the printout will be twice as long but
half as wide.
When enabled, the printer will automatically reposition the horizontally
adjacent labels to a vertically adjacent position, or a combination of horizontal
and vertical positions based on the values selected under the Auto Label
Width and Num Auto Labels menu items.
When disabled, excess data in any program sent to the printer with
horizontally adjacent labels that exceed the physical page width of the printer
will be clipped or wrapped depending upon the setting of the Autowrap menu
option.
The options are Disable (the factory default) and Enable.
Examples
All of the examples below assume that the logical form length is set to the
label length.
Example 1: Simple Case
Problem: A file has been constructed with two horizontally adjacent 4” labels
for a printer with a physical width of 8”. The user now wants to use this file
with a printer that has a 4” physical width.
Solution: The user sets Auto Label Width to 4” (the width of the label),
configures the Num Auto Labels to 2, and enables the Auto Label Mapping
feature.
Printer Operation: The printer will print the first (leftmost) 4” label first. Once
the first label has been completed, the printer will print the second 4” label.
These labels will appear vertically adjacent on the form.
Thermal Printer Output
Line-Matrix Printer Output
Label 1
Label 1
Label 2
Label 2
Wide Web Width
Narrow
Web
Width
75
Chapter
4
MEDIA SETUP Menu
Example 2: Uneven Number Case
Problem: A file has been constructed with three horizontally adjacent 2”
labels. The user now desires to use this file with a printer that has a 4”
physical width.
Solution #1: The user sets Auto Label Width to 4” (the width of two labels),
configures the Num Auto Labels to 2, and enables the Auto Label Mapping
feature.
Printer Operation for Solution #1: The printer will print the first two labels at
the same time. These first two labels will be horizontally adjacent. Once these
labels have been completed, the printer will print the remaining 2” labels along
with a blank 2” label.
File Contents:
Label
1
Label
2
Print Output:
Label
3
Label
1
Label
2
Label
3
Blank
Label
Solution #2: The user sets Auto Label Width to 2”, configures the Num Auto
Labels to 3, and enables the Auto Label Mapping feature.
Printer Operation for Solution #2: The printer will print the first 2” label by
itself, the second 2” label by itself, and finally, the last 2” label by itself.
Label
1
Label
2
Label
3
Label
1
Label
2
Label
3
76
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
Example 3: Past Maximum File Width
Problem: A file has been constructed with three horizontally adjacent 4”
labels. The user now desires to use this file with a printer that has a 8”
physical width. The user should have used a solution similar to one of the
solutions in the section above, but the user erroneously enters an Auto Label
Width of 12” and a Num Auto Labels of 3.
Printer Operation: Maximum Num Auto Labels = (20”/12”) = 1.67 rounded up
to 2. The printer will automatically reduce the Num Auto Labels to 2.
Example 4: Blank Label Case
Problem: A file exists with two horizontally adjacent 4” labels. The user now
wants to use this file with a printer that has a 4” physical width. The user
decides to set the Num Labels to 3 and the Label Width to 4” despite the fact
that these values are not optimum.
Printer Operation: The maximum Num Auto Labels = (20”/4”) = 5. The
selected value of 3 is legal. After the file is sent, the printer will begin by
printing the first 4” width label. Once that label is complete, it will print the
second 4” width label. Finally, once both of those labels have been printed,
the printer will print a blank 4” label.
File Contents:
Label
1
Label
2
Print Output:
Label
1
Label
2
Blank
Label
Auto Label Width
The width of a single label to be printed or the maximum width of the media
that will be used for the print file. The value is selectable from 00.1 inch
through the maximum print width of the printer.
NOTE: The maximum Auto Label Width value will be limited to the current
MEDIA CONTROL/Label Width value selected in the configuration
menu.
The default value depends on model width and size of DRAM installed.
77
Chapter
4
MEDIA SETUP Menu
Num Auto Labels
The desired number of labels to be printed vertically adjacent on the form.
The value is selectable with a range of 1 through 40 labels.
The factory default is 2.
Slew Speed Ctrl
The speed at which the printer moves media without actually printing on it.
•
•
Automatic (factory default). Always the same as the print speed.
Manual. Allows you to set the slew speed. The maximum speed depends
on your printer model (see “Print Method” on page 205).
Print Direction
This option determines the basic print image orientation.
NOTE: Print Direction will not change the orientation of any print test patterns
in the DIAGNOSTIC menu.
Print Direction has two options:
•
•
Head First
Foot First
For example, with Portrait orientation, when you select Head First, the top-ofform will come out of the printer first. Conversely, when you select Foot First,
the bottom-of-form will come out first.
FEED
A
A
Head First
Foot First
Print Direction and Orientation are two independent options that can be
combined to produce the following results depending on the Active IGP
Emulation:
Table 8. Head First
78
Print Direction
Option
Orientation Option
Result in Active IGP Emulations
(IGP/PGL)
Head First
Portrait
Portrait
Head First
Landscape
Landscape
Head First
Inv. Portrait
Inv. Portrait
Head First
Inv. Landscape
Inv. Landscape
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
Table 9. Foot First
Print Direction
Option
Orientation Option
Result in Active IGP/ZGL
Emulation
Foot First
Portrait
Portrait
Foot First
Landscape
Inv. Landscape
Foot First
Inv. Portrait
Inv. Portrait
Foot First
Inv. Landscape
Landscape
The factory default is Head First when PGL is enabled.
The factory default is Foot First when ZGL is enabled.
Tear-Strip Time
When Media Handling is set to Tear-Off Strip or when Media Handling is set
to Continuous and Continuous Mode is set to Tear Strip Full, Tear-Strip Time
specifies the number of seconds after the buffer is empty that the printer will
wait before it advances media to the tear bar position.
The range is .1 to 60.0 seconds, and the factory default is 1.0 second.
Label Missing
Allows the Label Taken Sensor to first detect the presence of a label at the
tear bar for Peel Off Media Handling Mode only.
•
Fault Disable (factory default). The printer does not generate a fault
condition if a missing label is encountered.
•
Fault Enable. The printer generates a fault condition if a missing label is
encountered.
Clip Page
This option determines how the printer handles images that are too large for
one physical page length when using gap or black mark media.
•
Enable (factory default). When the user-selected page length is greater
than the physical page length, the printer clips the excess data to fit the
physical page. The excess data is lost. The media sensor constantly
looks for the gap, notch, hole, or black mark and when detected, uses it
as the Top-of-Form position for the next label and clips any remaining
data from the label being printed.
79
Chapter
4
MEDIA SETUP Menu
•
Disable. When the user-selected page length (logical length) is greater
than the physical page length dictated by the gap, notch, hole, or black
mark on media, the printer continues to print the remaining excess data
onto the next physical page.
The media sensor looks for the gap, notch, hole, or black mark only after
the media has advanced the distance specified by the Label Length value
in the MEDIA SETUP menu or by the Host Forms Length value sent via
the software. Any gaps, notches, holes, or black marks that exist prior to
reaching the Label Length or Host Forms Length value are ignored.
When Clip Page is set to Disable, Mark and Gap media sensing reliability
can be improved and the sensor problems described below can be fixed:
•
The image starts to print at an erroneous distance from the top-ofform, especially towards the end of a roll where the media is severely
curled or scalloped.
•
The image is incorrectly positioned as a result of the media sensor
triggering off of a dark, pre-printed image on the label or multiple gaps
within the label.
•
The printer starts to print one label and then another all on the same
physical label, especially at the end of a roll where the media is
severely curled.
•
An occasional blank label appears within a print job (in between
printed labels).
When Clip Page is set to Disable, the printer ignores any pre-printed dark
marks or multiple gaps on a label that could mistakenly be detected as
the next top-of-form position based on the specified Label Length value.
The Label Length option is in the MEDIA SETUP menu.
NOTE: When Clip Page = Disable, the correct Label Length value must be
entered. If the value is too long, the printer will ignore the actual gap
or mark it needs to detect. When using Gap sensing, the Label
Length value is equal to the physical length of a die cut or removable
label. When using Mark sensing, the Label Length value is the
physical distance from the leading edge of one black mark to the
leading edge of the next black mark.
Fault Reprint
This option determines how the printer handles data that was printing when
an error occurred.
•
Disable (factory default). The printer will not reprint the label that was
printing when the error condition occurred.
•
Enable. The printer reprints the label that was printing when the error
condition occurred.
NOTE: When Fault Reprint is set to Enable and a RIBBON OUT condition
occurs, some labels may not reprint. This depends on the label
length, print speed selected, and the additional time it takes to detect
this condition. Be sure to verify that all labels were reprinted after a
RIBBON OUT condition by using the Ribbon Low indicator as
described on page 81.
80
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
Display Ribbon
When enabled and the printer is online, after some number of labels have
been fed, "Ribbon Life" and 1 to 4 asterisks will display on the last line of the
LCD indicating the approximate amount of ribbon remaining on the supply
spindle, based on a standard 450m ribbon. An exact value cannot be
determined, since ribbon thickness and roll lengths vary:
Ribbon Life **** = Full to 3/4 full
Ribbon Life -*** = less than 3/4 to 1/2 full
Ribbon Life --** = less than 1/2 to 1/4 full
Ribbon Life ---* = less than 1/4 to 1/8 full
The options are Enable (factory default) and Disable.
Display Ribbon displays if Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER
SETUP menu.
Ribbon Low
When enabled, and the ribbon remaining on the supply spindle is less than
1/8 full, the Attention indicator will flash, and "Ribbon Low" displays on the last
line of the LCD. A Ribbon Low warning will not prevent printing.
The options are Disable (factory default) and Enable.
Ribbon Low displays if Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER SETUP
menu.
Units
This item selects either millimeters or inches as the unit of measure.
The options are In Inches (factory default) and In Millimeters.
Set Label Length
This feature selects whether the Sensed Distance value derived from an Auto
or Manual Calibrate will be used to set the Label Length value in the MEDIA
SETUP menu.
•
Manual (factory default). The Sensed Distance value derived from an
Auto or Manual Calibrate will not override or change the Label Length
value.
•
Automatic. When an Auto or Manual Calibrate is performed, the Sensed
Distance value derived from either calibrate will override and change the
Label Length value. If no Auto or Manual Calibrate is performed, the
current Label Length value will be used.
NOTE: When Set Label Length = Automatic and Gap/Mark Sensor = Gap,
the printer will subtract the Gap Length value (in the SENSOR
SETUP menu) from the Sensed Distance value obtained when the
Auto or Manual Calibrate was performed.
Setting the label length to “Automatic” sets the “Use Label Length”
menu to “Disable” in the MEDIA SETUP menu.
81
Chapter
4
MEDIA SETUP Menu
TOF Detect Fault
Allows selection of three different TOF (Top-of-Form) detection faults.
NOTE: The correct Label Length value, equal to the physical length of the
installed label, must be entered MEDIA SETUP menu.
•
3 Labels (factory default). The printer displays a Gap Not Detected fault
and stops printing when media has advanced a distance equal to three or
more times the Label Length value set in menu.
•
•
9 Labels
1 Label
TOF Adjust Mode
•
Disable (factory default). This option disables the “TOF Adjust” distance
set using the TOF Adjust menu (see TOF Adjust below).
•
Enable. This option enables the “TOF Adjust” distance set using the TOF
Adjust menu (see TOF Adjust below).
TOF Adjust
This opton sets the distance from the Top Of Form (TOF) that is left blank
(unprinted) after a label has been removed in Tear-Off Strip. Normally printing
is done starting at TOF, but when this mode is enabled the start position for
printing can be adjusted from 0.00 to 0.40 inches from TOF (in increments of
0.01 inch). This adjustment can be helpful if a die cut label sticks to the platen
by means of jagged edges created during a poor die cut label removal using
the tear bar. By controlling how much blank space there is from TOF, you can
control how much the media is called back after it is torn off.
82
SENSOR
SETUP
Menu
MEDIA
SETUP
Submenus
SENSOR SETUP Menu
SENSOR
SETUP
(from page 66)
Gap/Mark
Sensor
Run Auto-Cal
Run Profile
Run Manual
Cal
190 2
000 to 255
Gap Length
0.12 inches*
0.05 to 1.00 inches
Gap/Mark
Thresh 4
0.00 inches 3
0.01 inches to xx inches 4
Gap*
Disable
Mark
Paper Out
Thresh 4
Sensed
Distance
Pwr Up
Auto-Cal
Enable*
Disable
Cal in Peel
Mode
Disable*
Enable
Head
Auto-Cal
20*
012 to 050
Online
Auto-Cal
Disable*
Enable
Enable*
Disable
Min Calib
Delta
140 1
000 to 255
Use Label
Length
Disable*
Enable
Gap
Windowing
Disable*
Enable
Threshold
Range
50%*
5% to 95%
Mark TOF
Detect 5
Mark Trail Edge*
Mark Lead Edge
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
1 If
Gap/Mark Sensor (in the SENSOR SETUP menu) is set for Gap sensing, the factory default is 140.
If Gap/Mark Sensor is set for Mark, the factory default is 75.
2
If Gap/Mark Sensor (in the SENSOR SETUP menu) is set for Gap or Disable sensing, the factory default is 190.
If Gap/Mark Sensor is set for Mark, the factory default is 150.
3
You can change the unit value to millimeters. Set Units submenu to “In Millimeters” (in the MEDIA SETUP menu).
4
The value range varies depending on calibration results.
5 This
option applies only when Gap/Mark Sensor is set to Mark.
83
Chapter
4
SENSOR SETUP Menu
SENSOR SETUP Submenus
Gap/Mark Sensor
The available options specify the sensor type needed for detecting the
Top-of-Form position on media with label length indicators (gaps, notches,
holes, or black marks).
•
Gap (factory default). Select when using media with a liner space
between die-cut labels or when using tag stock with holes as label length
indicators on white background media. The Top-of-Form position is the
leading edge of the die cut label (trailing edge of the gap, notch, or hole).
•
Disable. Select when using media with no label length indicators
(no gaps, notches, holes, or black marks), or when you want the printer to
ignore all existing label length indicators on the installed media.
NOTE: When you select Disable, the length of each label is based on the
Label Length value entered in the MEDIA SETUP menu or the value
sent via host software.
•
Mark. Select when using media that has horizontal black marks or
inboard notches located on the underside of the label liner or tag stock.
The Top-of-Form position is the trailing edge of the black mark.
The Top-of-Form depends on the Mark TOF Detect menu.
Run Auto-Cal (Auto-Calibrate)
This feature is used to set the sensitivity and reliability of the Media Sensor in
detecting gaps, notches, holes, or black marks on the installed media, as well
as a paper out condition.
Press the ↵ key with “Run Auto-Cal” displayed. The printer will then advance
media the distance needed to accurately detect the label length indicators,
then stop at the Top-of-Form position and momentarily display the Sensed
Distance. The process takes a few seconds to complete. The end result will
be a change to the Gap/Mark Threshold, Paper Out Threshold, and Sensed
Distance values that the printer will use. The changes in values take effect
immediately within the current configuration menu.
Run Auto-Cal is completed successfully when the Sensed Distance displayed
correctly matches that of the installed media. When Gap is selected, the
Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing edge of one gap to
the trailing edge of the next gap (one label + one gap). When Mark is
selected, the Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing edge
of one black mark to the trailing edge of the next black mark.
Run Auto-Cal supports label lengths up to 39 inches for Gap or Mark sensing
when Use Label Length is set to Disable.
84
SENSOR SETUP Submenus
Run Profile
This feature provides a graphical printout showing the relationship of the
Paper Out Threshold and the Gap/Mark Threshold. The profile printout
assists you in setting the thresholds for difficult media. This includes
preprinted labels, and labels with poor gap/media dynamic range.
When selected, the printer will advance media and print the media profile
along the length of each label. The printer will continue to print the profile until
you press ↵.
Sensed Distance
This value (in inches) represents the distance that was sensed between the
TOF of one label to the TOF of the next label. With gapped media installed,
the distance equals the physical label length plus one gap, notch, or hole
(trailing edge of one gap, notch, or hole to the trailing edge of the next gap,
notch, or hole). With black mark media installed, the distance equals the
trailing edge of one black mark to the trailing edge of the next. This value is
automatically determined only after successful completion of Auto or Manual
Calibrate and cannot be changed manually.
The factory default is 0.00 inches.
Gap/Mark Thresh
This menu item sets a value that, when exceeded by the output of the media
sensor, is recognized by the printer as a gap (or black mark). When Auto or
Manual Paper Calibrate is performed, the value displayed is equal to the
gap/mark threshold value set by this procedure. If running the procedure does
not provide a reliable Top-Of-Form detection, e.g., when using unusual
media, the Gap/Mark Thresh value can be manually set to the desired value.
The range is 000 to 255. The factory default value depends on the calibration
results.
NOTE: If Gap/Mark Sensor (in SENSOR SETUP menu) is set for Gap
sensing, the factory default is 140. If Gap/Mark Sensor is set for
Mark, the factory default is 75.
Paper Out Thresh
This menu item selects a value that, when exceeded by the output of the
media sensor, is recognized by the printer as a paper out condition. When
Auto or Manual Calibrate is performed, the value displayed is equal to the
paper out threshold value set by this procedure. If running the procedure does
not provide a reliable paper out detection, e.g., when using non-standard
media, the Paper Out Thresh value can be manually set to the desired value.
The range is 000 to 255. The factory default value depends on the calibration
results.
NOTE: If Gap/Mark Sensor (in SENSOR SETUP menu) is set for Gap or
Disable sensing, the factory default is 190. If Gap/Mark Sensor is set
for Mark, the factory default is 150.
85
Chapter
4
SENSOR SETUP Menu
Run Manual Cal
Run Manual Cal is another method of improving the printer’s media sensing
and is only used when Auto Calibrate has failed or the Gap/Mark Threshold or
Paper Out Threshold values derived from Auto Calibrate do not improve the
media sensors’ gap or mark sensing capability.
To initiate Run Manual Cal, press ↵ when “Run Manual Cal” displays under
the SENSOR SETUP menu. You will then be prompted for the remaining
steps.
Example: “REMOVE MEDIA/Press Enter”
NOTE: When requested to load an item make sure to place the item in a
position where the media sensor can detect the item. For example,
when requested to “LOAD MARK” place the Mark (Black TOF Line) at
the media sensor.
During the last stage of Run Manual Cal, the printer uses the statically derived
values, advances media, stops at the Top-of-Form position, and momentarily
displays the Sensed Distance. This process takes longer than Auto Calibrate,
and the end result is a change to the Gap/Mark Threshold, Paper Out
Threshold, and Sensed Distance values that the printer will use. These value
changes take effect immediately within the current configuration menu.
Run Manual Cal is completed successfully when the displayed Sensed
Distance correctly matches that of the installed media. When Gap is selected,
the Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing edge of one
gap to the trailing edge of the next gap (or one label + one gap). When Mark is
selected, the Sensed Distance should match the length from the leading edge
of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark.
Run Auto-Cal supports label lengths up to 39 inches for Gap or Mark sensing
when Use Label Length is set to Disable.
Pwr Up Auto-Cal
•
Enable (factory default). When the printer is first powered on, it will
complete its initialization and self-tests and then perform an Auto
Calibrate. Once the Auto Calibrate is complete, the printer will
momentarily display the Sensed Distance determined by the Auto
Calibrate.
•
Disable. No media calibration will be done when the printer is powered
on.
Head Auto-Cal
This option selects whether the printer does a media calibration after a
Printhead Open fault.
86
•
Enable (factory default). Performs media calibration each time the
Printhead Open fault condition is cleared.
•
Disable. No media calibration after Printhead Open fault.
SENSOR SETUP Submenus
Online Auto-Cal
NOTE: Online Auto-Cal will not function when there is data in the the buffer
and when Error Recover (in MEDIA SETUP menu) is enabled
(see page 68).
The options for Online Auto-Cal are:
•
•
Disable (factory default).
Enable. Whenever the printer is brought online, it automatically performs
an Run Auto-Cal (see “Run Auto-Cal (Auto-Calibrate)” on page 84). Once
the Run Auto- Cal is complete, the printer momentarily displays the
Sensed Distance determined by the Auto Calibrate and then resumes
printing any pending jobs.
NOTE: If using the Online Auto-Cal feature, you must first enable it prior to
printing any data.
Gap Windowing
This feature compensates for any early falling edges or spurious peaks and
troughs that may appear within the gap length in media. These edges or
peaks and troughs can cause unreliable detection of the leading edge of the
next label (top-of-form). Use Gap Windowing to resolve the following
problems:
•
•
Loss of one or more complete (serialized) labels.
•
Top part of an image lost when printing in head-first orientation.
Start of an image printed in the middle of a gap, especially with fanfold,
perforated media.
The options for Gap Windowing are Disable and Enable:
•
Disable (factory default). When the leading edge of a gap is detected, the
printer continuously looks for the leading edge of the next label and uses
it as the TOF position. Perforations or unusual media discrepancies within
the gap can cause inaccurate TOF detection.
•
Enable. When the leading edge of a gap is detected, the printer ignores
the first 90% of the gap length value specified in the Gap Length menu
option. The result is that cross perforations or unusual media
discrepancies within the gap are filtered out, allowing the printer to
reliably detect the actual leading edge of the next label and use it as the
TOF position.
Gap Length
Gap Length is the actual length (height) of a label gap measured in .01 inch
increments. The range is 0.05 to 1.00 inches.
NOTE: You must enter the correct Gap Length. If the Gap Length is too long,
the image will shift down from the leading edge (TOF) of the label.
The factory default is 0.12 inches.
87
Chapter
4
SENSOR SETUP Menu
Cal in Peel Mode
This option allows you to perform a calibration (Run Auto-Cal or Pwr Up
Auto-Cal) in Peel-Off Media Handling mode.
•
Disable (factory default). The printer will not permit calibration and a
“CANNOT CALIBRATE/Disable Peel-Off” message will briefly display.
Additionally, if “Pwr Up Auto-Cal” is enabled, the printer will not perform
calibration at power up.
•
Enable. Run Auto-Cal can be performed from the front panel, and if the
Pwr Up Auto-Cal option is enabled, calibration will be performed at power
up.
NOTE: Calibration in Peel-Off mode does not stop and wait for you to remove
peeled labels. Therefore, be prepared to remove the labels as they
are automatically peeled.
Min Calib Delta
Minimum Calibrate Delta changes the minimum threshold value the sensor(s)
require to detect the difference between the label and a gap, notch, hole or
black mark. This allows bolder gaps (such as notches or holes) to be used as
the TOF while intermediate gaps (liner) can be ignored. Increasing the Min
Calib Delta makes the sensor(s) less sensitive to intermediate gaps and
noise. Decreasing the Min Calib Delta makes the sensor(s) more sensitive for
detecting gaps on low contrast media, where there is very little difference
between the label and the gap (liner).
The range is 012 - 050. The factory default is 20.
Use Label Length
Determines whether or not the Label Length value set in the MEDIA SETUP
menu is used during Run Auto-Cal.
•
Disable (factory default). Run Auto-Cal relies exclusively in its ability to
detect varying transitions between labels and gaps, notches, holes, or
black marks while advancing media during the calibrate process to
determine Sensed Distance. The amount of media advanced is based on
the number of transitions detected.
NOTE: Although the “Use Label Length” keeps its value (enable/disable) at
all times, it will always be disabled when “Set Label Length” is set to
“Automatic”. The correct setting will take effect when “Set Label
Length” is set to manual. Based on the setting on the “Set Label
Length” menu in the Media Setup menu, the “Use Label Length”
menu will be ignored (disabled).
•
88
Enable. The Label Length value set in the MEDIA SETUP menu is used
in the calibrate algorithm. This causes the Run Auto-Cal process to
advance media the minimum distance required to detect the true gap,
notch, hole, or black mark used for TOF (Top-of-Form) sensing. This
resolves problems where the sensor(s) may mistake high noise levels or
preprinted images within the label as the gap, notch, hole, or black mark
that could result in a sensed distance value much shorter than the actual
label length. Example: A 0.2 inch calibrated Sensed Distance with a 3.0
inch long label installed.
SENSOR SETUP Submenus
NOTE: Setting the Label Length value less than half the actual length of the
label in use will result in erroneous Sensed Distance values when
Run Auto-Cal is performed.
Threshold Range
This option allows the user to select the optimal threshold range for the label
stock in use. The printer defaults to using a threshold range of 50% of the
positive going pulse (see Media Profile) that represents each gap, notch or
mark detected after doing an Auto or Manual Calibrate. The printer then
detects anything within the label with that threshold range as TOF. While this
range is ideal for most medias, some labels with a preprinted image, liner gap
or inlay can confuse the media sensor(s) causing a false TOF detection. In
most cases this can be resolved by selecting a higher threshold range so the
printer will only trigger on the true TOF (gap, notch or mark) position.
NOTE: Set the label length value in the Media Setup menu to the actual
length of the installed labels. A new threshold range will not take
affect until an Auto or Manual Calibrate is successfully performed. A
Media Profile should be run after a Calibrate to visually verify that the
new range is the best possible selection.
The range is: 5% to 95% in 5% increments
The factory default is 50%.
Mark TOF Detect
NOTE: This option applies only when Gap/Mark Sensor is set to Mark.
Allows the user to select which edge of the black line is used for TOF (Top Of
Form). The leading edge refers to the first edge seen by the media sensor as
the media feeds out of the printer or the start of the black line.
•
Mark Trail Edge (factory default). Trailing edge or end of black line
denotes TOF.
•
Mark Lead Edge. Leading edge or start of black line denotes TOF.
89
Chapter
4
EMULATION MENU
EMULATION MENU
Overview
This section covers the following emulations:
•
•
PGL (page 92)
ZGL Config. (Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter (PPI) ZGL
Programmer’s Reference Manual.)
•
TGL Config. (Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter (PPI) TGL
Programmer’s Reference Manual.)
•
IGL Config. (Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter (PPI) IGL
Programmer’s Reference Manual.)
•
STGL Config. (Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter (PPI) STGL
Programmer’s Reference Manual.)
•
DGL Config. (Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter (PPI) DGL
Programmer’s Reference Manual.)
You can select emulation default parameters directly from the control panel, or
by control codes as explained in the appropriate Programmer's Reference
Manual.
IMPORTANT
BEFORE you reconfigure an emulation, print a configuration sheet to
see all current settings.
PGL
The PGL emulation is the software based Printronix Graphics Language
(PGL) for the Printronix thermal printer family. It is based upon, and
compatible with, the IGP-100/200/400 board. It includes the following
features:
On-Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels
with a “preprinted” look for each application. PGL programs control all graphic
functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing
time.
Graphic capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal lines with userselectable thickness, logos, and special alphanumeric print features. Forms
and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically.
Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned “fixed” information (entered
when the form is created), be overlayed onto the form (positioned in a specific
location after the form is created), or may be dynamically merged with the
form.
Selectable Bar Codes provide you with the appropriate bar code for your
application using standard wide-to-narrow ratios. A wide selection of bar
codes are available: Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, UPC-A, UPC-E, MSI A
through D, Code 128 Subset A, B, and C, EAN/UCC-128, EAN 8, EAN 13,
POSTNET, PostBar, Royal Mail, and PDF417. UPC and EAN bar codes can
specify add-on data.
90
EMULATION
MENU
Overview
Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where
needed. Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a
wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size (up
to 11.3 inches wide and tall). Compressed print sizes of 12, 13, 15, and 17
characters per inch (cpi) are available.
Logos are created using alphanumeric commands and add many print and
shading features for a “customized” appearance to forms, reports, and labels.
Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,
expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees
clockwise or counterclockwise, or they can be printed upside down.
Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing white
characters on a dark background.
Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.
You can identify individual numeric and bar code data fields, which includes
automatic increment or decrement functions.
Scaling Capability permits graphic elements, such as corners or boxes, to
retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical
density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi.
Multinational Character Sets provide 32 international character sets, each
96 characters in length. This feature also allows you to create your own
character sets using characters defined and stored in memory.
Extended Character Sets provide 33 extended character sets, also
containing 96 characters in length. These are also stored in memory.
91
Chapter
4
EMULATION MENU
EMULATION
(from page 66)
Select
Emulation
Setup
PGL*
ZGL
TGL
IGL
STGL
DGL
PGL
Setup 1
ZGL
Setup 1
TGL
Setup 1
See page 93 or Refer to the ZGL
refer to the PGL Programmer’s
Programmer’s
Reference Manual
Reference
Manual
STGL
Setup 1
Refer to the STGL
Programmer’s
Reference Manual
Refer to the TGL
Programmer’s
Reference Manual
IGL
Setup 1
Refer to the IGL
Programmer’s
Reference Manual
DGL
Setup 1
Refer to the DGL
Programmer’s
Reference Manual
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User (in
the PRINTER SETUP menu).
1
This menu appears only if the emulation is selected in the Select
submenu.
92
PGL
Setup
Overview
PGL Setup
PGL
SETUP
(from page 90)
Character
Group
Standard
Sets
See page 95
0) ASCII*
1) German
2) Swedish
3) Danish
4) Norwegian
5) Finnish
6) English
7) Dutch
8) French
Autowrap
Auto
Uppercase
Disable*
Enable
Var Form
Type
Add Nothing*
Add;0
Add;X
Power on
IGP/PGL
Enable*
Disable
Do FF
at TOF
Enable*
Disable
Disable*
Enable
Select LPI
6*
9) Spanish
1 to 1000
10) Italian
11) Turkish
12) CP 437
13) CP 850
14-15) Reserved
16-23) Dwn Overlay
24-31) User Def.
Slash 0
Disable*
Enable
Optimized
Ratio
Disable*
Enable
Ext Execute
Copy
Disable*
Enable
Expanded
Font
Scalable*
Block
Alt Block 1
PI Slew
Range
16*
15
Select SFCC
126*
1 - 255
CR Edit
Disable*
Enable
AI 00 Spaces
Disable*
Enable
Select SO
Char
14*
0 to 255
Scalable
Size
Normal*
Block
Define CR
Code
Define LF
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
Host Form
Length
Var Form
Adjust
Enable*
Var. Length
Var Dynamic Len
Disable
Skip
Cmd Prefix
Enable*
Disable
Ignore
Mode
Disable*
Enable
Forms
Handling
PGL
Normal
Disable*
Auto Reject
Auto TOF
LP+ Menu*
PGL Menu
00.0 inches*
00.1 inches to
03.0 inches
Ignore Text
Disable*
Enable
Select Char
0*
0 to 255
UPC
Descenders
Always*
Never
Only With PDF
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to
Enable (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
93
Chapter
4
EMULATION MENU
PGL SETUP
(continued
from page 93)
I-2/5
Selection
Leading Zero*
Trailing Space
X2 DPD
Modulo 7 CD
Error
Report
On*
Debug Mode
Fault
Off
C39
Compatbl.
Disable*
Enable
Boundary
Check
Enable*
Disable
User-Def
Ratio
Enable*
Disable
Lead
PDF Dist
0.10 Inches*
0.01 inches to
0.10 inches
Repeat Form
Opt
Enable*
Disable
Preparser
Cmd
STATUS*
CANCEL
Trunc
Dyn Data
Disable*
Enable
Preparser
Port
Disable*
Parallel
Serial
Ethernet
Vertical
Adjust
0 Dots*
-20 to 20 dots
Storage
Select
DISK = EMC*
DISK = PCB FLASH
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to
Enable (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
94
PGL
Setup
Overview
Character
Group
(from page 93)
Standard
Sets*
0) ASCII*
1) German
2) Swedish
3) Danish
4) Norwegian
5) Finnish
6) English
7) Dutch
8) French
9) Spanish
10) Italian
11) Turkish
12) CP 437
13) CP 850
14-15) Reserved
16-23) Dwn Overlay
24-31) User Def.
Arabic Sets
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
IBM CP864
IBM CP1046
Arabic Lam One
Arabic Lam Two
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri
European
Sets
Cyrillic Sets
Code Page 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
Cyrillic 7 Bit
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latvian 866
Latin 2 8859-2*
Code Page 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Greek Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
UTF-8
Notes:
* = Factory Default.
To access the desired basic character set, use the Left
and Right keys. To select the set, press the ↵ key. After
you have selected the basic set, access the subset
selection menu by pressing the Down key. Once in the
subset menu, access the desired subset by pressing
the Left and Right keys and select it by pressing the
↵ key.
95
Chapter
4
EMULATION MENU
EMULATION Submenus
Select
This function allows you to activate any resident emulation listed in the menu.
The factory default is PGL.
There are two methods for selecting the desired emulation:
•
Select the emulation under the Select menu option and save it as
Power-up Config.
•
Send a host command to switch the emulation automatically (see the
appropriate Programmer’s Reference Manual for details).
Emulation Setup
Options for setting up the emulations. The options are PGL Setup, ZGL
Setup, TGL Setup, STGL Setup, IGL Setup, and DGL Setup. Refer to the
appropriate Programmer’s Reference Manual.
PGL Setup Submenus
NOTE: The submenu descriptions do not include ZGL, TGL, IGL, STGL, and
DGL emulations.
Character Group and Character Sets
This menu item selects the character set used by the printer. See page 95 for
the available character sets.
Select LPI
This is the number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is
1/6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line.
The options are 1 to 1000 LPI. The factory default is 6.0 LPI.
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (0D hex) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (0A hex) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends line feeds to the printer.
96
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each
carriage return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The
next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
EMULATION Submenus
Define LF Code
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code
into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in
most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send
carriage returns to the printer.
NOTE: For this menu to take effect in PGL, PGL Normal needs to be set to
PGL Menu (see page 93).
•
LF = LF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return.
The next print position will be at the current print character position on the
next line.
•
LF = CR + LF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print
position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Autowrap
This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of
text exceeds the right margin.
•
Disable (factory default). Truncates the text beyond the right margin until
a CR or CR + LF is received.
•
Enable. Automatically inserts a CR + LF after a full print line.
Auto Uppercase
This parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase when using
the ALPHA command.
•
Disable (factory default). The printer will print text in upper and
lowercase.
•
Enable. The printer will print text in uppercase only.
Slash 0
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B.
•
•
Disable (factory default). Zero is printed without a slash.
Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.
Select SFCC
You can specify which decimal code (1-255) will be used as the Special
Function Control Code (SFCC). The SFCC denotes that the following data is
a PGL command.
The range is 1-255, and the factory default is 126.
97
Chapter
4
EMULATION MENU
Host Form Length
Determines how the physical label length (see Label Length under the MEDIA
SETUP menu) is affected upon receiving an EXECUTE command.
•
Enable (factory default). The physical label length will change to match
the form length (specified in CREATE command). The physical label size
remains at the new setting until another EXECUTE command is received,
or the PRINTER SETUP menu settings are changed.
•
Var. Length. The physical label length is the longest print element
defined in CREATE mode, including both static and dynamic elements,
plus the setting of “Var Form Adjust” with CREATE;NAME;0.
•
Var Dynamic Len. The physical label length will change to the longest
print element defined in the form, including the dynamic element in
EXECUTE mode and the static element in CREATE mode, plus the
setting of “Var Form Adjust” with CREATE;NAME;0.
•
Disable. Forms printed in EXECUTE mode do not change the physical
label size. Therefore, the size of the form (defined in CREATE mode)
must fit within the current label dimensions, or errors may occur.
NOTE: The difference between Var. Length and Var Dynamic Len is for
example, CREATE;NAME;0. If there are 10 dynamic fields defined in
CREATE mode, but only three dynamic fields are used in EXECUTE
mode (for Var. Length), the label length will be based on the longest
printed element among the 10 dynamic field and the static element
defined in CREATE mode. For Var Dynamic Len, the label length will
be based on the longest printed element among the three fields
defined in EXECUTE mode and the Static element defined in
CREATE mode.
Var Form Adjust
This specifies an amount (in tenths of inches) to add to the length of variablelength forms. Variable-length forms use a semicolon at the end of the
CREATE command: ~CREATE;<FORMNAME>;0.
Var Form Type
•
•
Add Nothing (factory default). When selected, no action is taken.
•
Add ;X. When selected, the form length is the same as the physical page
length (the Label Length menu under MEDIA SETUP). (Same as
∼CREATE;filename;X).
Add ;0. When selected, the form length ends at the longest printed
element. (Same as ∼CREATE;filename;0)
Optimized Ratio
This option selects different bar code ratios for certain bar codes including
Code 39 and Interleaved 2 of 5. It is included for compatibility with the
IGP-X00 printers.
•
•
98
Disable (factory default). Use standard bar code ratios.
Enable. Select the alternate bar code ratios.
EMULATION Submenus
PI Slew Range
You can specify how many lines the paper will feed.
•
•
16 (factory default). A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.
15. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will move
1 line.
CR Edit
This parameter determines if a carriage return will be followed by a line feed.
•
Disable (factory default). The printer ignores all carriage returns that are
not followed by line feeds.
•
Enable. The printer processes all carriage returns, even for those that are
not followed by line feeds.
Skip Cmd Prefix
Stands for Skip Command Prefix. This parameter determines if the printer will
print any data before a PGL command is received.
Ignore Text
•
Disable (factory default). When disabled, text in normal mode will be
printed. Attributes to be printed depend on the PGL Normal menu setting.
•
Enable. When enabled, any line of text (non-PGL commands) in normal
mode will be ignored.
Power on IGP/PGL
You can set the IGP/PGL feature so that it is enabled or disabled when the
printer is powered on.
•
Enable (factory default). IPG/PGL is enabled when the printer is powered
on. (The PGL feature is initialized in Normal mode).
•
Disable. PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on. (The PGL
feature is initialized in Quiet mode).
Ext Execute Copy
•
Disable (factory default). Dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are not allowed
if the optional Form Count parameter (number of forms to print) is
specified as part of the Execute command. (This setting is IGP-100
compatible.)
•
Enable. Dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are allowed within a form where
the Form Count parameter is specified in the Execute command. In this
case, the same form is printed for whatever the Form Count is.
Incremental data is not incremented since the printing page is the same.
The overlay data is only printed with the first form and not on subsequent
forms, and each form is printed on a separate page.
99
Chapter
4
EMULATION MENU
AI 00 Spaces
This option is designated for EAN/UCC-128 barcodes whose application
identifier (AI) is 00.
•
Disable (factory default). The printable data field is printed with the AI
enclosed in parentheses. This is the standard EAN/UCC-128 format.
•
Enable. The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated
by spaces. This option is IGP-X00 compatible.
Select SO Char
Allows you to specify a decimal code from 0 through 255 to be used in place
of SO (Shift Out) as the control code which allows access for the alternate set
of control function characters. See the description of the Code 128 barcodes
in the PGL Programmer's Reference Manual for details.
The range is 0 to 255, and the default is 14.
Ignore Mode
This parameter instructs the IGP to ignore the character selected under the
Select Character menu.
•
•
Disable (factory default). The IGP does not ignore any characters.
Enable. The IGP ignores the character specified in the Select Character
menu.
Select Char
This parameter selects which character to discard when Ignore Mode is
enabled.
•
•
0 (the default)
0 - 255. Any character from 0 to 255 in decimal.
Do FF at TOF
Determines whether the printer, with media already set at the TOF (Top-ofForm) position, will advance media to the next TOF position upon receipt of
an FF command.
100
•
Enable (factory default). The printer will advance media from the present
TOF position to the next TOF position upon receipt of an FF command,
causing a blank form.
•
Disable. The printer will not advance media from the present TOF
position to the next TOF position upon receipt of an FF command.
EMULATION Submenus
Expanded Font
Expanded font allows you to print characters in different sizes with specified
parameters and to select which font face to use.
•
•
•
Scalable (factory default). Uses scalable fonts.
Block. Uses block fonts.
Alt Block 1. Uses alternative block fonts with a different character set.
Scalable Size
This option determines whether scalable characters are sized based on
normal scaling or based on the size of block characters. If the option Block is
set, then the scalable character are made to be the same size as block
characters in the old IGP-X00 printers.
The options are Normal (factory default) and Block.
Forms Handling
This submenu allows the user to handle the form in the following ways:
•
•
Disable (factory default). No effect.
•
Auto TOF. Automatically does a form feed (FF) to the next top of form if
the form is in the middle of the page.
Auto Eject. Automatically moves to the next TOF if the form is in the
middle of the page, and then ejects a page by performing a form feed
( FF).
PGL Normal
This option determines whether PGL passes the text data in Normal mode or
whether PGL will print the data text itself.
•
LP+ Menu (factory default). PGL will pass the text data to the menu only
in default setting state.
•
PGL Menu. PGL will always print the text data itself.
UPC Descenders
This parameter allows you to print bar code descenders when human
readable data is not presented in the UPC/EAN bar codes.
•
Always (factory default). UPC/EAN bar codes are printed with
descenders, even if there is no human readable data.
•
Never. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if the PDF
command is present.
•
Only With PDF. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed with descenders only
when the PDF command is presented.
101
Chapter
4
EMULATION MENU
I-2/5 Selection
This option is added to be compatible with a special IGP-X00 customization.
Usually, if Interleaved 2/5 bar codes have an odd number of digits, a leading
zero is inserted in front of the data. However, this special IGP-X00
customization gives you the option of adding a space character at the end of
the bar code instead.
•
Leading Zero (factory default). A leading zero is inserted in front of the
data.
•
Trailing Space. A space is inserted at the end of the data instead of a
leading zero.
•
X2 DPD. When selected, I-2/5 bar code with a magnification X2 will use
the specially configured ratios 3:3:6:5 rather than 3:6:9:12 for
compatibility issues.
•
Modulo 7 CD. The I-2/5 bar code uses a modulo 7 check digit instead of
the default modulo 10 check digit.
C39 Compatbl.
This menu makes the old method of decoding C39 alternative character set
compatible with the new method. For example in the old method for barcode
data, %K123%M, the barcode scans as [123]. The new method scans the
barcode as %K123%M.
•
•
Disable (factory default). Uses the current way of decoding.
Enable. Matches the old method of decoding.
User-Def Ratio
This option allows you to ignore the user-defined barcode ratio and replace it
with the default ratio (X1).
•
•
Enable (factory default). Allows the user-defined barcode ratio.
Disable. The user-defined barcode ratio will be replaced with the default
ratio (X1).
Lead PDF Dist
Adjusts the leading and trailing character spacing distance of the PDF for
UPC/EAN barcodes.
The range is 0.01- 0.10 inches in 0.01 inch increments, and the factory default
is 0.10 inches.
Trunc Dyn Data
This submenu allows the user to truncate the dynamic data up to the
maximum data length specified in Create Mode.
102
•
Disable (factory default). If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data
length, an error will report.
•
Enable. If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length, the data
truncates.
EMULATION Submenus
Vertical Adjust
This option is to adjust printer dpi to expand or shrink the vertical position of
graphic elements and the height of the vertical line. The factory default is 0
dots. The adjustment range is from -20 dots to 20 dots with respect to the
current printer dpi.
Error Report
This item sets the error reporting capability of the printer for PGL forms as
follows:
•
On (factory default). Full error checking reported. Any element that falls
off the current page is reported as an error.
•
Debug Mode. Puts the printer in debug mode whenever a form is defined
in CREATE mode. Each line of the CREATE form will be printed along
with an error if one has occurred.
•
Fault. Allows you to halt the printer if a PGL error occurs. If you select this
option, the PGL error prints on the paper, the message “IGP/PGL Error”
displays on the front panel, and the printer goes offline. You must clear
the error before the printer can resume normal operation.
•
Off. There is no error checking whatsoever. Graphic elements such as
alpha, line, barcodes, etc. will be clipped if they are beyond the page
boundaries.
Boundary Check
This option turns on or off the page boundary check for all print elements.
•
Enable (factory default). When enabled, an out of bound error is reported
if the print element is out of the page boundary.
•
Disabled. When disabled, no out of bound error is reported. The out of
bound print element prints over the page boundary.
Repeat Form Opt
•
Enable (factory default). Speeds up the processing of repeated forms for
PGL, thereby resulting in increased printer throughput. This option
provides no speed benefit for forms that are unrelated to one another and
should be disabled under those circumstances.
•
Disable. Should be selected when subsequent forms are unrelated to
one another.
Preparser Cmd
Allows users to select which preparser command to use. Once the command
is selected, the command will be executed immediately when it is sent to the
printer.
•
•
Status (factory default). Select (STCC) STATUS command.
Cancel. Select (STCC) CANCEL command.
103
Chapter
4
EMULATION MENU
Preparser Port
Allows users to select which port to send the Preparser command to the
printer.
•
•
•
•
Disable (factory default). Not using the Preparser command.
Parallel. The Parallel port (including attached Ethernet card).
Serial. The Serial port.
Ethernet. The embedded Ethernet port. This option only shows when the
embedded ethernet is installed.
Storage Select
Allows the user to map the parameter DISK to either EMC (Expanded
Memory Cartridge) or PC Flash (PC Board Flash).
•
•
104
Disk = EMC (the factory default)
Disk = PCB Flash
Printer Setup
Menu
EMULATION
Submenus
PRINTER SETUP Menu
PRINTER
SETUP
(from page 66)
SMT: Status 1
Disable*
Enable
Power-up
State
Online*
Offline
Del Char
frm Fls
PAA: Status 2
Disable*
Enable
PTX Setup
Parse
Enable*
Ignore
Disable
Ld Char
from Fls
Power Saver
Time
15 minutes*
30 minutes
45 minutes
60 minutes
240 minutes
1 minute
5 minutes
10 minutes
PTX Setup
SFCC
21h*
01-FF
Save Char
to Fls
Pwr Save
Control
Enable*
Disable
Cancel Key
Enable*
Disable
Del Char
frm RAM
Display
Language
English*
German
French
Italian
Spanish
Portuguese
Compatibility
Alarm
On*
Cont. Beep
Off
Ret. Status
Port
Default*
Laser
P5000
T3000
T1006
Serial*
E-Net Stat Port
USB
IEEE 1284
Disable
E-Net Data Port
Ld Char at
PwrUp
Del Set
frm Flsh
Disable*
Enable
Ld Set
from Flsh
Save Set
to Flsh
Del Set
from RAM
Ld Set
at PwrUp
Disable*
Enable
Main FFS
EMC FFS 3
Overwrite Files*
Enable*
Disable
View Main Files
Delete Files
Flash Avail.
Overwrite Files*
Enable*
Disable
View EMC Files
Delete Files
Flash Avail.
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
1
This menu appears if the RFID option is installed.
2
This menu appears if the RFID option is not installed and a CST (Character Sequence Table) file was loaded.
3
This menu appears if the EMC is installed.
105
Chapter
4
PRINTER SETUP Menu
PRINTER SETUP
(continued
from page 105)
Print
File List
Optimize&
Reboot
Auto Locking
Set Lock Key
Max Font
Buffer
Disable*
Enable
Max Cache
Memory
900 KBytes*
50 to 2000 KBytes
OCR-B
Chars.
304*
0 to 512
Max Cached
Char
Standard
Chars.
100 KBytes*
100 to 1800 Kbytes
Bold
Chars.
Extra Bold
Char.
OCR-A
Chars.
01 KBytes*
01 to 20 KBytes
340*
0 to 512
448*
0 to 512
504*
0 to 512
384*
0 to 512
Tall
Characters
Batch
Counter
Date 1
Disp.
Intensity
Admin
User
Disable*
Enable
Disable*
Enable
10*
0 to 20
Disable*
Enable
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable (in the PRINTER
SETUP menu).
1
This menu appears only if the real time clock option is installed.
PRINTER SETUP Submenus
SMT: Status
See “Software Migration Tools (SMT)” in the RFID Labeling Reference
Manual.
106
•
Disable (factory default). The printer disables the use of the Software
Migration Tools functionality.
•
Enable. The printer enables the use of the Software Migration Tools
functionality.
PRINTER SETUP Submenus
PAA: Status
See “Printronix Application Adapter” in the Remote Management Software
Advanced Tool Kit User’s Manual.
•
Disable (factory default). The printer disables the use of PAA
functionality.
•
Enable. The printer enables the use of PAA functionality.
Power Saver Time
The time interval you specify for this parameter sets the amount of idle time
before the printer goes into Power Saver mode.
Pressing any key removes the power saver message from the control panel.
Sending a print job to the printer also turns off power saver mode.
The options are 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 45, 60, and 240 minutes.
The factory default is 15 minutes.
Pwr Save Control
Pwr Save Control allows you to enable and disable Power Saver mode. If
enabled, the menu for Power Saver Time is in effect.
The options are Enable (factory default), Ignore, and Disable.
Display Language
This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the LCD: English,
German, French, Italian, Spanish, or Portuguese.
The factory default is English.
Alarm
•
On (factory default). An audible alarm sounds (3 beeps) when a fault
occurs, such as a paper jam.
•
Cont. Beep. A continuous audible alarm sounds when a fault occurs,
which can be stopped by pressing CLEAR.
•
Off. No audible alarm sounds.
Power-up State
•
•
Online (factory default). The printer powers up in the online state.
Offline. The printer powers up in the offline state. This selection must be
saved as a power-up configuration to be used.
107
Chapter
4
PRINTER SETUP Menu
Ptx Setup Parse
•
Enable (factory default). Will parse and execute the PTX SETUP
commands.
•
•
Ignore. Will parse the PTX SETUP commands but not act on them.
Disable. Will not parse the PTX SETUP commands so they will print out
as text.
Ptx Setup SFCC
Allows you to choose the hex value of the ASCII character you wish to use as
the SFCC for the PTX SETUP command. Valid hex values are 01-FF.
The factory default value is hex 21, which corresponds to the “!” character.
Cancel Key
•
Enable (factory default). When enabled, the key may be used in offline
mode to clear all data in the print buffer, and deleted data will not be
printed.
•
Disable.
Compatibility
This parameter allows you to make SL4M/T4M series thermal printers
compatible with other printers.
When trying to preserve compatibility with respect to barcodes, you may not
always be able to make them equal in size. This is due to the various dot-perinch differences between printer types. When an exact match cannot be
made, the barcode is reduced in size so that the form bounds will not be
compromised and the barcode will be readable.
•
•
Default. Use for optimum performance.
•
P5000. Forces the output to correspond with the P5000 line of line matrix
printers.
•
T3000. Forces the output to correspond with the T3000 line of thermal
printers.
•
T1006. Forces the output to correspond with the T1006 line of thermal
printers.
Laser. Forces the output to correspond with the Printronix laser line of
printers.
The factory default is Default.
Ret. Status Port
This option selects the port for the Return Status Commands (i.e., ~STATUS
(PGL) and ~HS (PPI/ZGL)) to send the status data back to the Host.
The options are Serial (factory default), E-NET Stat Port, USB, IEEE 1284,
Disable, and E-NET Data Port.
Del Char frm Fls
108
PRINTER SETUP Submenus
This option deletes downloaded character(s) from flash memory.
Ld Char from Fls
This option loads downloaded character(s) from flash memory.
Save Char to Fls
This option saves downloaded character(s) to flash memory.
Del Char frm RAM
This option deletes downloaded character(s) from RAM.
Ld Char at PwrUp
This option loads downloaded character(s) from flash memory at Power Up.
The options are Disable (factory default) and Enable.
Del Set frm Fls
This option deletes downloaded overlay set(s) from flash memory.
Ld Set from Fls
This option loads downloaded overlay set(s) from flash memory.
Save Set to Fls
This option saves downloaded overlay set(s) to flash memory.
Del Set from RAM
This option deletes the downloaded overlay set(s) from RAM.
Ld Set at PwrUp
This option loads the downloaded overlay set from flash memory at Power
Up.
The options are Disable (factory default) and Enable.
109
Chapter
4
PRINTER SETUP Menu
Main FFS
•
Overwrite Files (factory default). This allows you to prevent files in the
main file system from being overwritten by disabling the overwrite
function.
•
•
View Main Files. Displays the list of files in the main file system.
•
Flash Avail. The amount of flash available for the user to save or
download files into main flash.
Delete Files. Allows you to delete files in the main file list. Contact your
administrator for assistance.
EMC FFS
•
Overwrite Files (factory default). This allows you to prevent files in the
Extd file system from being overwritten by disabling the overwrite
function.
•
•
View EMC Files. Displays the list of files in the Extd file system.
•
Flash Avail. The amount of flash available for the user to save or
download files into Extd flash.
Delete Files. Allows you to delete files in the Extd file list. Contact your
administrator for assistance.
Optimize&Reboot
Reclaims flash space from deleted flash files. After pressing ↵ wait for the
printer to reboot.
NOTE: The Optimize feature will optimize both the Main and Extd file system
(if present).
Print File List
Prints a summary of the files stored in flash memory and several statistics on
File System usage.
Auto Locking
•
•
110
Disable (factory default). The ↵ (ENTER) key must be locked manually.
Enable. The printer automatically locks the ↵ key five minutes after the
last control panel key press.
PRINTER SETUP Submenus
Set Lock Key
Normally, to lock or unlock the printer menu, the ↓ and ↵ keys are pressed at
the same time. The Set Lock Key parameter lets you choose different keys to
lock or unlock the printer menu. You may choose almost any group of keys as
the new lock and unlock keys. You cannot use the ↵ key or any key
combinations which are already used for another function. There is no limit to
how many keys can be selected.
To set the new lock key:
1. Go to the PRINTER SETUP main menu and select “Set Lock Key.”
2. Press ↵. The display reads, “Select a new lock key.”
3. Press the combination of keys that you want to be the new lock key. Make
sure you press all keys selected at the same time.
4. If the selection is valid, the display will read, “Enter the new lock key
again.” Press the same combination of keys a second time. If the
selection is invalid, the display will read, “Invalid key selection.” Return to
step 2 and start over.
5. If the new lock key combination is entered again correctly, the display will
read, “Lock key has been changed.” If it was entered incorrectly, the
display will read, “Validation failed.” Start over at step 1.
6. After entering the new lock combination successfully, press the Pause
key to put the printer back online.
NOTE: The new lock combination will remain even if the printer is powered
off and back on.
Max Font Buffer
The maximum amount of DRAM allocated for downloading fonts (TrueType,
Scalable, or Bitmap).
The range is 100 to 800 Kbytes, and the factory default is 100 Kbytes.
111
Chapter
4
PRINTER SETUP Menu
Max Cache Memory
The Maximum Cache Memory option specifies the size of the memory block
that can be allocated to the font cache. The font cache stores bitmaps that are
created on demand from the font outlines stored on the printer flash. The
cache allows the printer to print scalable fonts at optimum speed.
To calculate the memory requirement, use this equation:
(HS x VS x Average Height x Average Width x NumOf Char) / 8
NOTE: HS = Horizontal resolution
VS = Vertical resolution
Average Height = Average character height (inches)
Average Width = Average character width (inches
NumOfChar = Number of Characters to be cached
The allowable range is 50 KBytes through 2000 KBytes in 50-KByte
increments.
The factory default is 900 KB.
NOTE: For most applications, the default settings for font memory are
acceptable. Therefore, do not change the defaults unless your
application requires an uncommon memory configuration.
Max Cached Char
The Maximum Cached Characters option specifies the size of the largest
character that can be stored in the font cache. To calculate the memory
requirement, use this equation:
(HS x VS x Average Height x Average Width) / 8
NOTE: HS = Horizontal resolution
VS = Vertical resolution
Average Height = Average character height (inches)
Average Width = Average character width (inches
NumOfChar = Number of Characters to be cached
For example, with a print head that prints at 203 dpi you would use the
following formula:
203 X 203 X 1 X 1
= 5,151
8
Therefore, select a value that is equal to or greater than 5,151. The closest
available value is 6 KBytes.
The allowable range is 1 KByte through 20 KBytes, in 1 KByte increments.
The factory default is 01 KBytes.
NOTE: For most applications, the default settings for font memory are
acceptable. Therefore, do not change the defaults unless your
application requires an uncommon memory configuration.
112
PRINTER SETUP Submenus
Standard Chars.
This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of standard
text fonts.
The range is 0 to 512, and the factory default is 340.
Bold Chars.
This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of bold text
fonts. This menu will not take effect unless you save it in a configuration and
the printer is powered up with that configuration.
The range is 0 to 512, and the factory default is 448.
Extra Bold Char.
This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of extra
bold text fonts.
The range is 0 to 512, and the factory default is 504.
NOTE: For most applications, the default settings for font memory are
acceptable. Therefore, do not change the defaults unless your
application requires an uncommon memory configuration.
OCR-A Chars.
Character weight adjustment of resident OCR-A characters.
The range is 0 to 512, and the factory default is 384.
OCR-B Chars.
Character weight adjustment of resident OCR-B characters.
The range is 0 to 512, and the factory default is 304.
Tall Characters
Increases the point height of resident Intellifont characters.
•
Disable (factory default). Standard resident font character point height is
maintained.
•
Enable. Increases the point height of resident Intellifont characters
approximately 10%.
113
Chapter
4
PRINTER SETUP Menu
Batch Counter
Displays the number of pages remaining in a print job.
•
Disable (factory default). The # Pages remaining to be printed will not
display. Instead, the Active emulation and interface will display on the
second line of the control panel LCD.
•
Enable. The # Pages remaining to be printed will display on the second
line of the control panel LCD. This feature is supported in PGL and ZGL
only. The PGL Execute command to support this feature is
~EXECUTE;NAME;(#Pages). The ZGL Execute command is
^PQ(#Pages).
NOTE: If the correct execute command is absent from the print file, “0 Pages”
will continually display on the control panel LCD.
Date
This menu allows you to set the date and time. The date is expressed in
hh:mm YYYYMMMDD.
hh = hour (24 hour format)
mm = minute
MMM = month
DD = day
YYYY = year
Disp. Intensity
Sets the Display Intensity values from 0 to 20. The factory default is 10.
Admin User
•
•
114
Disable (factory default).
Enable. When enabled, this function permits access to submenu items
which would not normally be changed by a typical user.
INTERFACE
Menu
PRINTER SETUP
Submenus
INTERFACE Menu
INTERFACE
(from page 67)
Host
Interface
Auto Switching*
Centronics
Serial
IEEE 1284
Ethernet 1
USB
Ethernet
Port 1
Timeout*
10 sec*
1-60 sec
Switch Out On
Data Timeout*
Session Close
WLAN
Setting 3
Ethernet
Setting
IP Address 2
Subnet Mask 2
Gateway Address 2
MAC Address 2
IP Assignment 2
DHCP
Disable
Enable*
Boot P
Disable
Enable*
NetBIOS
Enable*
Disable
ASCII Data Port
9100*
0 - 65535
Keep Alive Timer
3 minutes*
2-10 minutes
Ethernet Speed 2
Auto Select*
10 Half Duplex
10 Full Duplex
100 Half Duplex
100 Full Duplex
Job Control
Standard*
Enhanced
Off
Offline Process
Disable*
Enable
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
MAC Address
IP Assignment 2
DHCP
Disable
Enable*
Boot P
Disable
Enable*
Signal Strength
Operation Mode
Infrastructure*
Pseudo IBSS
Ad Hoc
SSID Name
Reset SSID Name
Min Xfer Rate
Auto-negotiate*
1 Mb/sec.
2 Mb/sec.
5.5 Mb/sec.
11 Mb/sec.
Channel
Default*
1-15
Ant. Diversity
Diverse
Primary*
Auxiliary
Parallel
Port
USB
Port
Serial
Port
Printer Mgmt
See page 116
Buffer Size in K
16*
1 - 16
Timeout
10 sec.*
1 - 60 sec.
See page 117
See page 118
Preamble
Default*
Short
Long
Power Mgmt
0 ms
0 - 1000 ms
Transmit Power
100%
0 -100%
Internat. Mode
Disable*
Enable
Auth Method
Open*
Shared
WEP Key 1
WEP Key 2
WEP Key 3
WEP Key 4
Default WEP Key
Reset WEP Keys
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to
Enable (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
1
This menu appears if a NIC or Wireless NIC is installed.
2
This menu item appears only if an Ethernet is installed.
3
This menu appears only if a Wireless Option is installed.
115
Chapter
4
INTERFACE Menu
Parallel Port
(from page 115)
Port
Type
IEEE 1284*
Disable
Centronics
Timeout
10 sec.*
1 - 60 sec.
Latch
Data On 1
Data Bit 8 1
Enable*
Disable
Report
Status
Disable*
Enable
PI Ignored 1
Enable*
Disable
Buffer Size
in K
16*
1-16
Prime
Signal
Disable*
Enable
Data
Polarity 1
Disable*
Enable
Auto Trickle
Disable*
Enable
Resp.
Polarity 1
Standard*
Inverted
Trickle Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Busy on
Strobe 1
Enable*
Disable
Offline
Process
Notes:
Leading*
Trailing
Disable*
Enable
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to
Enable (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
1
This menu appears only if Centronics is selected under
Host Interface in the Parallel Port option (in the Interface
menu)
116
INTERFACE
Menu
PRINTER SETUP
Submenus
Serial Port
(from page 115)
Baud
Rate
9600 BAUD*
600 BAUD to
115200 BAUD
Trickle
Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Poll
Response
0 ms*
0 - 30 ms
Word
Length
Stop Bits
Parity
1*
2
8*
7
Timeout
10 sec.*
1 - 60 sec.
Idle
Response
Disable*
Enable
Report
Status
Disable*
Enable
None*
Odd
Even
Mark
Sense
XON/XOFF*
ETX/ACK
ACK/NAK
Series1 1Char
Series1 2 Char
DTR
Data Term
Ready
Request to
Send
True*
On-Line and BNF
Off-Line or BF
On-Line
False
One Char
Enquiry
Disable*
Enable
Data
Protocol
Printer
Status
Disable*
ENQ/STX
ENQ
On-Line and BNF*
Off-Line or BF
On-Line
False
True
Buffer Size
in K
16*
1 - 16
Poll
Character
00 Hex*
00-FF Hex
Framing
Errors
Enable*
Disable
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to
Enable (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
117
Chapter
4
INTERFACE Menu
Printer Mgmt
(from page 115)
PNE Port
Disable*
Serial
Ethernet 1
Parity 2
None*
Odd
Even
PNE Port
Timeout 1
100 Seconds*
1 - 255
Select Port 2
Mgmt
Protocol
PXML*
UCP
Debug*
Host
Modem 2
9600 BAUD*
2400 BAUD TO
115200 BAUD
Modem NUM 2
Disable*
Enable
Enable*
Disable
Status Port
Number 1
3002*
0 - 65535
Baud Rate 2
8*
7
Modem
Status 2
Enable*
Disable
Stop Bits 2
Word
Length 2
1*
2
Dial
Method 2
Tone*
Pulse
PNE Port
Number 1
3001*
1023 - 65535
Mgmt Port
Number 1
3007*
0 - 65535
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable (in the
PRINTER SETUP menu).
1
This option appears if a NIC is installed.
2
This menu appears if PNE Port is set to Serial.
INTERFACE Submenus
Port Type
This option allows you to send print jobs through any interface with
autoswitching selected as host interface. It also allows a particular interface
from the menu to be selected.
The options are Auto Switching (factory default), Centronics, Serial,
IEEE 1284, and Ethernet.
NOTE: The Ethernet option appears only if Ethernet is installed.
118
INTERFACE Submenus
Parallel Port
•
Port Type. This menu item selects the type of printer parallel port
interface to be used with the host.
The options are IEEE 1284 (factory default), Disable, and Centronics.
•
Data Bit 8
•
Enable (factory default). The PI line is not passed directly from host
to printer; all 8 bits are used for data bits, and characters in the hex
80-FF range can be accessed.
•
Disable. When the host PI line is enabled, data bit 8 internally
indicates PI line status. To use the PI line, disable data bit 8, and
enable the Host PI configuration option (under the PI Ignored option).
NOTE: Data bit 8 is interpreted as either data bit 8 or PI signal, but never
both. When enabled as data bit 8, data bit 8 has priority over the PI
signal, and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data
and not to interpret PI line data.
Conversely, when data bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used, data
bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function, and you cannot
access characters in the hex 80-FF range. Therefore, to access
characters in the hex 80-FF range, data bit 8 must be enabled.
•
•
PI Ignored. The PI (Paper Instruction) signal is used to control vertical
paper motion.
•
Enable (factory default). Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as
characters or control codes.
•
Disable. Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU
commands when the PI signal is true.
Buffer Size in K. This option configures the amount of memory allocated
for the Ethernet buffer. The range is 1-16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.
The factory default is 16 Kbytes.
•
Auto Trickle. This feature is used to prevent a host computer from
“timing out” because the parallel interface is “busy” for too long.
•
Disable (factory default). The Auto Trickle feature is not used.
•
Enable. When the printer’s buffers are almost full, the printer begins
to trickle data in from the host (at the rate set in the Trickle Time
menu) until the buffers start to empty out.
119
Chapter
4
INTERFACE Menu
•
Trickle Time. When the printer is printing data from a host and a second
print job is received by the printer from a different host, Trickle Time
prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to
be printed. In order to support this feature, the port has to be able to
accept data from the host and store it for future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then
receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the
parallel port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a
timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel
port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next
byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the
host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its
buffer too fast.
The options are 1/4 (factory default), 1/2, 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16 seconds and
Off.
•
Timeout. This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current
port and check the other selected port types for data to print. When the
printer has not received data from the host after a certain period of time, it
needs to time out in order to service the other ports.
The range is 1-60 seconds, and the factory default is 10 seconds.
•
•
•
•
120
Report Status
•
Disable (factory default). When a fault occurs on the printer, only the
active port reports the fault to the host.
•
Enable. The port will report any fault even when it is not the current
active port.
Prime Signal
•
Disable (factory default). The parallel port will not perform a warm
start (reboot) if the host asserts the Prime Signal.
•
Enable. The parallel port will perform a warm start (reboot) if the host
asserts the Prime Signal.
Data Polarity. The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data
polarity of your host computer.
•
Standard (factory default). Does not expect the host computer to
invert the data.
•
Inverted. Expects the data received on the data lines from the host
computer to be inverted. Ones become zeros and vice versa.
Resp. Polarity. The Response Polarity parameter must be set to match
the response polarity of your host computer.
•
Standard (factory default). Does not invert the response signal.
•
Inverted. Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer.
INTERFACE Submenus
•
•
Busy on Strobe
•
Enable (factory default). Asserts a busy signal after each character is
received.
•
Disable. Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full.
Latch Data On. Specifies whether the data is read on the leading or
trailing edge of the data strobe signal.
The options are Leading (factory default) and Trailing.
•
Offline Process
•
Disable (factory default). When set to disable, the printer does not
process parallel/network data while offline.
•
Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process (but not
print) the current network/parallel job while the printer is offline until
the printer's buffer is full.
USB Port
•
Buffer Size in K. This option configures the amount of memory allocated
for the serial port buffer. The range is 1-16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.
The factory default is 16.
•
Timeout. This item allows you to set the time that the printer, when it has
not received data from its host, will begin to service all other host ports
looking for data to print.
The range is 1-60 seconds, and the default is 10 seconds.
Printer Mgmt
•
PNE Port. This menu selects which port the printer expects PNE to
connect to, via Ethernet or Serial. The factory default is Disable.
•
Mgmt Protocol. Since PXML and UCP management protocols share the
same Ethernet Port, only one can be active at a time. This menu selects
the active Management Protocol Interface, either PXML or UCP. The
factory default is PXML.
•
Select Port
•
Debug (factory default). If the PNE Port is set to Serial then the PNE
will communicate through the Debug Serial Port.
•
Host. If the PNE Port is set to Serial then the PNE will communicate
through the Host Serial Port. This cannot be selected if Host Interface
is set to Auto Switching or Serial.
121
Chapter
4
INTERFACE Menu
•
Baud Rate. Sets the baud rate of the serial interface used to
communicate to the PNE. Baud rate is the speed at which serial data is
transferred between the PNE and the printer. The options for the RS-232
interface are 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and
115200 Baud.
NOTE: If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200 and you
experience data loss, you may need to lower the baud rate.
The factory default is 9600.
•
Word Length. Sets the length of the serial data word. The length of the
data word can be set to 7 or 8 bits and must match the corresponding
data bits setting in the PNE. The factory default is 8.
•
Stop Bits. Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word. Either 1 or
2 stop bits can be selected. The setting must match the corresponding
stop bit setting in the PNE. The factory default is 1.
•
Parity. The options are Odd, Even, Mark, Sense, or None. The setting
must match the corresponding parity setting in the PNE.
The factory default is None.
•
Modem
This menu enables or disables the modem interface. After changing the
modem menus, save the configuration as the power-up configuration and
reboot the printer. The factory default is Disable.
NOTE: Connect the modem to the selected serial interface for printer
management (debug or host serial), and power on the modem before
powering on the printer. The printer will search for a modem at
power-up, and display a message on the printer front panel if a
modem is detected.
•
Modem NVM
This setting defines whether the modem configuration, as stored in the
modem's NVM, should be used, or if the printer should send a modem
intialization string. When enabled, the printer will only send an ATZ0
command to the modem on power-up. This command resets the modem
to configuration 0. When disabled, the printer sends a generic modem
initialization string on power-up. The factory default is Enable.
NOTE: This generic initialization string does not work for all modem types.
If the initilization string does not work, the modem must be configured
manually, the setting must be stored in configuration 0, and the
printer 'Modem NVM' menu must be set to enable.
•
122
Modem Status
•
Enable (factory default). Displays the modem status commands on
the printer control panel.
•
Disable. Does not display the modem status commands on the
printer control panel.
INTERFACE Submenus
•
Dial Method
•
Tone (factory default). Sets the modem to use the tone dialing
method.
•
Pulse. Sets the modem to use the pulse dialing method.
•
PNE Port Number. This menu selects the port number the printer
expects the PNE to connect through. The factory default is 3001 and the
range is from 1023 to 65535.
•
PNE Port Timeout. If the PNE has not communicated to the printer within
a timeout period, the PNE session closes. The factory default is 100
seconds. The range is from 1 to 255 seconds.
•
Status Port Number. This is the Ethernet Port number the emulations
can use to communicate status to the host computer.
•
Mgmt Port Number. This is the Ethernet Port number the PXML or UCP
will use to communicate to the printer.
Serial Port
•
Baud Rate. Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer. Baud
rate is the speed at which serial data is transferred between the host
computer and the printer. The options for the RS-232 interface are 600,
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 Baud.
NOTE: If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200 and you
experience data loss, you may need to lower the baud rate.
The factory default is 16K.
The factory default is 9600.
•
Word Length. Sets the length of the serial data word. The length of the
data word can be set to 7 or 8 bits and must match the corresponding
data bits setting in the host computer.
The factory default is 8.
•
Stop Bits. Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word. Either 1 or
2 stop bits can be selected. The setting must match the corresponding
stop bit setting in the host computer.
The factory default is 1.
•
Parity. The options are Odd, Even, Mark, Sense, or None (factory
default). The setting must match the corresponding parity setting in the
host computer.
123
Chapter
4
INTERFACE Menu
•
124
Data Protocol. You can select one of the following serial interface
protocols to meet the host interface requirements.
•
XON / XOFF (factory default). The printer controls the flow of
communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off.
In some situations, such as when the buffer is full or the timing of
signals is too slow or too fast, the printer will tell the host to stop
transmission by sending an XOFF character. An XOFF character is
sent when the number of empty bytes in the buffer is less than or
equal to 25 percent of the buffer size. If the host keeps sending data
after an XOFF is sent, the printer firmware will continue to send an
XOFF for every 16 characters received. When cleared, the printer will
resume receiving data (XON). The data does not have any End of
Text codes; XON / XOFF is a non-block protocol.
•
ETX / ACK. End of Text / Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of
communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending
the block with an End of Text (ETX) signal. When the printer receives
the ETX signal, it will acknowledge the ETX, thereby acknowledging it
has received the entire block of data.
•
ACK / NAK. ACK means acknowledge; the device acknowledges it
has accepted a transmission. NAK means negative acknowledge; the
device did not receive the transmission.
•
Series1 1 Char. The printer controls the flow of communication from
the host by turning the transmission on and off using response
characters sent to the host. If the number of valid bytes in the buffer
reaches 75 percent of the buffer size, the online or offline and buffer
full response character is sent. If the buffer is completely full, an
online or offline buffer full response is sent every time a character is
sent from the host. Whenever the printer state changes to online or
offline, the appropriate response character is sent. If the idle
response option is enabled, the printer will send a response character
every two seconds while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less
than 75 percent of the buffer size. If a poll character is received
(configurable from the Poll Character xx Hex option on the front panel
from hex 0 through FF), the printer will send a response character n
milliseconds later (configurable from the Poll Character xx MS on the
front panel from 0 through 30). This n milliseconds is called the poll
delay. The poll character will be removed from the input data stream
and will not be processed. This may cause problems with the
transmission of binary data (e.g., control codes, bit image, etc.). If a
poll delay is started due to the receipt of a poll character and another
poll character is received, the second poll character has no effect and
is removed from the input data stream. If a transition (from buffer full
to empty or online to offline) occurs during a poll delay, the new
printer state will be sent at the end of the poll delay.
INTERFACE Submenus
The response characters are described below.
Printer State
Online and Buffer Empty
•
•
CR
Online and Buffer Full
3
Offline and Buffer Empty
0
Offline and Buffer Full
2
Series1 2 Char. This protocol behaves exactly the same as the
Series 1 Char except there is a two-character response to the host.
The response characters are described in the following table:
Printer State
•
Response
Response
Online and Buffer Empty
1 CR
Online and Buffer Full
3 CR
Offline and Buffer Empty
0 CR
Offline and Buffer Full
2 CR
DTR. The printer controls the data flow by sending this hardware
signal to the host. If there is enough room in the printer buffer, the
printer will send a high signal; if the buffer is full, the printer will send a
low signal. DTR tells the host if it is safe to send more data. (If the
host sends data during an unsafe condition, data will be lost.)
Buffer Size in K. This option configures the amount of memory allocated
for the serial port buffer. The range is 1-16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.
The factory default is 16.
•
Trickle Time. When the printer is printing data from a host and a second
job is received by the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents
the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed.
In order to support this feature, the port has to be able to accept data from
the host and store it for future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port and then
receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the
parallel port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a
timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel
port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next
byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the
host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its
buffer too fast.
The options are 1/4 (factory default), 1/2, 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16 seconds and
Off.
125
Chapter
4
INTERFACE Menu
•
Timeout. This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current
port and check the other selected Port Types for data to print. When the
printer has not received data from the host after a certain period of time, it
needs to time out in order to service the other ports.
The range is 1 to 60 seconds, and the factory default is 10 seconds.
•
Report Status. When a fault condition occurs in the printer, normally only
the active port reports the fault to the host. With this menu item enabled,
the port will report any fault even when it is not the current, active port.
The options are Disable (factory default) and Enable.
•
•
•
Data Term Ready. Stands for Data Terminal Ready. This configuration is
part of hardware flow control and determines when the Data Terminal
Ready (DTR) signal is generated. This signal indicates if the printer is
ready to receive data.
•
True (factory default). Continuously asserts the DTR signal.
•
False. Never asserts the DTR signal.
•
On-Line and BNF (buffer not full). Asserts the DTR signal when the
printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full.
•
Off-Line or BF (buffer full). Asserts the DTR signal when the printer
is offline or the internal serial buffer is full.
•
On-Line. Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online.
Request to Send. This configuration is part of hardware flow control and
determines when the Request to Send (RTS) signal is generated. This
signal indicates whether or not the printer is ready to receive data.
•
On-Line and BNF (factory default). Asserts the RTS signal when the
printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full.
•
Off-Line or BF. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is offline or
the internal serial buffer is full.
•
On-Line. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online.
•
False. Never asserts the RTS signal.
•
True. Continuously asserts the RTS signal.
Poll Character. This option is for the Series1 protocol. Whenever the
printer receives this character, it sends a response to the host indicating
the current state of the printer (see Series1 protocol).
The range is 00-FF Hex, and the factory default is 00 Hex.
•
Poll Response. This option is for the Series1 protocol. After receiving a
poll character, the printer will wait the poll response time in milliseconds
before sending the response.
The range is 0-30 ms, and the factory default is 0 ms.
126
INTERFACE Submenus
•
•
Idle Response. This option is for the Series1 protocol.
•
Disable (factory default).
•
Enable. The printer sends a response character every two seconds
while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of
the buffer size.
One Char Enquiry. The One Char Enquiry mode uses the Poll Character
to detect a request from the host and sends a response back to the host.
This option also allows you to turn on and off this feature.
Table 10. One Char Enquiry Response Characters
Printer State
Response (hex)
Online and Buffer Not Full
22
Online and Buffer Full
23
Offline and Buffer Not Full
20
Offline and Buffer Full
21
The Poll Character is removed from the data stream. If the Data Protocol
is set to ETX/ACK, ACK/NAK, or Series1, One Char Enquiry is
automatically disabled.
The options are Disable (factory default) and Enable.
•
Printer Status
•
Disable (factory default). Printer status ignored.
•
ENQ/STX (see Table 11).
•
ENQ (see Table 12).
When enabled, the printer will respond to an ENQ character by sending a
status byte to the host. The type of status byte is determined by a Front
Panel Menu selection. The selections allowed are ENQ/STX and ENQ.
The ENQ is removed from the data stream.
127
Chapter
4
INTERFACE Menu
Table 11. ENQ/STX Status Byte
Bit
Printer Status
0
Set when the printer is not online or the buffer is full.
1
Set when the printer is offline.
2
Clear during a paper out or RibbonMinder fault.
3
Always set.
4
Set during a Head Open fault.
5
Set during a buffer overflow fault.
6
Set during a parity or framing error fault.
7
Always clear.
Table 12. ENQ Status Byte
Bit
•
128
Printer Status
0
Set when the label has printed.
1
Set when the label is presented.
2
Set while the printer is online.
3
Always set.
4
Set printing in the batch mode.
5
Set during a Ribbon fault.
6
Set during a Paper Out fault.
7
Set during a Head Open fault.
Framing Errors. These are possible errors that can occur when serial
interface settings of the printer do not match those of the host computer.
•
Enable (factory default). If a framing error occurs, a fault message
will display on the control panel.
•
Disable. If a framing error occurs, a fault message will not display on
the control panel.
INTERFACE Submenus
Ethernet Port
•
Timeout. This is the value used by the printer to time out the current port
and check the other selected Port Types for data to print. When the
printer has not received data from the host after a certain period of time, it
needs to time out to service the other ports.
The range is 1 to 60 seconds, and the factory default is 10 seconds.
•
Switch Out On.
•
Data Timeout (the default). Allows Autoswitching when no data has
been received for the selected timeout period.
•
Session Close. Allows Autoswitching only when the Network Socket
is closed. If the Ethernet Adapter is not installed the Network Socket
is always reported as closed and this menu option is ignored.
Ethernet Setting
•
IP Address.This item allows you to set the IP Address for the TCP/IP
protocol in four three-digit segments (SEG1 through SEG4). If the IP
Address is assigned by Bootp, ARP or DHCP, it is dynamic and
read-only.
The factory defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000, 000, 000, and
000.
After specifying an IP address, you are prompted to:
Press ↵ to Save & Exit
Press
to Exit
Press
to Edit.
NOTE: When changing the IP Address, the printer resets the Network
Interface Card (NIC) when the printer is placed online. When the
printer resets the NIC, the LCD displays DO NOT POWER OFF.
The printer will then reboot to re-establish communication with the
NIC.
•
Subnet Mask. This item allows you to set the Subnet Mask for the
TCP/IP protocol in four three-digit segments (SEG1 through SEG4). If the
Subnet Mask is assigned by Bootp, Arp or DHCP, it is dynamic and
read-only.
The defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000, 000, 000, and 000.
NOTE: When changing the Subnet Mask, the printer resets the NIC when the
printer is placed online. When the printer resets the NIC, the LCD
displays DO NOT POWER OFF. The printer will then reboot to reestablish communication with the NIC.
129
Chapter
4
INTERFACE Menu
•
Gateway Address. This item allows you to set the Gateway Address for
the TCP/IP protocol in four three-digit segments (SEG1 through SEG4).
If the Gateway Address is assigned by Bootp, ARP or DHCP, it is
dynamic and read-only.
The defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000, 000, 000, and 000.
NOTE: When changing the Gateway Address, the printer resets the NIC
when the printer is placed online. When the printer resets the NIC, the
LCD displays DO NOT POWER OFF. The printer will then reboot to
re-establish communication with the NIC.
•
MAC Address. This item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is
unique for each NIC. It is read-only.
•
DHCP. You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but
consult your administrator for the appropriate setting.
The options are Enable (factory default) and Disable.
NOTE: When changing the DHCP, the printer resets the NIC when the printer
is placed online. When the printer resets the NIC, the LCD displays
DO NOT POWER OFF. The printer will then reboot to re-establish
communication with the NIC.
•
BootP
You can enable or disable the BootP protocol using this option, but
consult your administration for the appropriate setting.
The options are Enable (factory default) and Disable.
NOTE: When changing the BootP option, the printer resets the NIC when the
printer is placed online.
•
•
NetBIOS Protocol
•
Enable (factory default). The NIC will respond to the NetBIOS
protocol.
•
Disable. The NIC does not recognize the NetBIOS protocol.
ASCII Data Port. This option allows you to set the port number for ASCII
print jobs. The data port number needs to match your host system setting.
The range is 0 - 65535, and the factory default is 9100.
•
Keep Alive Timer. This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run.
Keep in mind that with the Keep Alive Timer on, the tcp connection will
stay connected even after the print job has terminated.
The range is 2-10 minutes, and the factory default is 3 minutes.
130
INTERFACE Submenus
•
Ethernet Speed. This menu appears only if a 10/100Base-T Network
Interface Card (NIC) is installed.
The Ethernet Speed menu has five different speed modes to allow
compatibility with different systems and networks:
•
•
Auto Select (factory default). Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to perform
an auto detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half Duplex,
10 Full Duplex, 100 Half Duplex, or 100 Full Duplex.
•
10 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10
Megabits per second using half duplex.
•
10 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10
Megabits per second using full duplex.
•
100 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100
Megabits per second using half duplex.
•
100 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100
Megabits per second using full duplex.
Job Control
•
Standard (factory default). The NIC waits for the entire job to be
received before it indicates the job is done.
•
Enhanced. The NIC waits for the entire job to be printed before it
indicates the job is done.
•
Off. There is no synchronization between the NIC and the printer.
NOTE: For detailed information about using the NIC, refer to the Network
Interface Card User’s Manual.
•
Offline Process
•
Disable (factory default). When set to disable, the printer does not
process parallel/network data while offline.
•
Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process (but not
print) the current network/parallel job while the printer is offline until
the printer's buffer is full.
131
Chapter
4
INTERFACE Menu
WLAN Setting
•
IP Address. This item allows you to set the IP Address for the TCP/IP
protocol in four three-digit segments (SEG1 through SEG4). If the IP
Address is assigned by Bootp, ARP or DHCP, it is dynamic and readonly.
The defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000, 000, 000, and 000.
When changing the IP Address, the printer resets the Network Interface
Card (NIC) when the printer is placed online. When the printer resets the
NIC, the LCD displays DO NOT POWER OFF. After the NIC has
completed its initialization, the printer reboots to re-establish
communication.
•
Subnet Mask. This item allows you to set the Subnet Mask for the
TCP/IP protocol in four three-digit segments (SEG1 through SEG4). If the
Subnet Mask is assigned by Bootp, Arp or DHCP, it is dynamic and
read-only.
The defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000, 000, 000, and 000.
When changing the Subnet Mask, the printer resets the NIC when the
printer is placed online. When the printer resets the NIC, the LCD displays
DO NOT POWER OFF. After the NIC has completed its initialization, the
printer reboots to re-establish communication.
•
Gateway Address. This item allows you to set the Gateway Address for
the TCP/IP protocol in four three-digit segments (SEG1 through SEG4). If
the Gateway Address is assigned by Bootp, ARP or DHCP, it is dynamic
and read-only.
The defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000, 000, 000, and 000.
When changing the Gateway Address, the printer resets the NIC when
the printer is placed online. When the printer resets the NIC, the LCD
displays DO NOT POWER OFF. After the NIC has completed its
initialization, the printer reboots to re-establish communication.
•
MAC Address. This item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is
unique for the NIC and the Wireless option. It is read-only.
•
DHCP. You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but
consult your administrator for the appropriate setting.
The options are Enable (factory default) and Disable.
NOTE: When changing the DHCP, the printer resets the NIC when the printer
is placed online. When the printer resets the NIC, the LCD displays
DO NOT POWER OFF. The printer will then reboot to re-establish
communication with the NIC.
•
BootP
You can enable or disable the BootP protocol using this option, but
consult your administration for the appropriate setting.
The options are Enable (factory default) and Disable.
NOTE: When changing the BootP option, the printer resets the NIC when the
printer is placed online.
132
INTERFACE Submenus
•
Signal Strength. This menu displays the strength of the wireless signal.
NOTE: This is a display value only and cannot be changed.
•
•
Operation Mode. Allows you to select the way the Wireless option
communicates:
•
Infrastructure (factory default). The Wireless option must go through
an Access Point.
•
Pseudo IBSS. Proprietary, peer-to-peer communication (without an
Access Point). The two peers must be specific to one manufacturer.
•
Ad Hoc. Standard, peer-to-peer communication (without an Access
Point). The two peers can be from different manufacturers.
SSID Name. A 1-32 character, case-sensitive string that identifies the
Extended Service Set Identification (ESS_ID) network the unit is part of.
(ESS_ID is also called NET_ID.) These characters can be alphanumeric,
symbols, or spaces. The SSID name and alphanumeric characters are
divided into three parts in the control panel menu as
“SSID Name (01-15)”, “SSID Name (16-30)” and “SSID Name (31-32).
NOTE: When two ore more consecutive space characters are used in the
SSID, enclose it in a double quoted string; otherwise upon resetting
the NIC, the SSID Name will be saved in the Wireless NIC with only
one space.
•
•
Reset SSID Name. Allows you to reset the SSID name.
•
Channel. Allows you to select the RF channel. The options are Default
and 1-15.
•
Ant. Diversity. The type of antenna used:
•
Min Xfer Rate. Allows you to set the minimum speed at which the
Wireless Option will accept a connection (in millions bits per second). The
options are Auto-negotiate (factory default), 1Mb/sec., 2Mb/sec.,
5.5Mb/sec., and 11Mb/sec.
•
Diverse. Select when you want to use the antenna with the best
reception.
•
Primary (factory default). Select when you want to use the Primary
antenna on the server.
•
Auxiliary. Select when you want to use the Auxiliary antenna on the
server.
Preamble. The length of the preamble in transmit packets.
•
Default (factory default). The Wireless option automatically
determines the length.
•
Short. For newer printers which can handle higher transfer rate
speeds.
•
Long. For older printers, which cannot handle higher transfer rate
speeds.
133
Chapter
4
INTERFACE Menu
•
Power Mgmt. This allows you to set power-save mode and sleep time. A
value specifying the sleep time in milliseconds will be provided. If set to
zero, power-save mode will be disabled.
The range is 0-1000 ms., and the factory default is 0 ms.
•
Transmit Power. The power level as a percentage of full power.
The range is 0 - 100%, and the factory default is 100%.
•
Internat. Mode. When enabled, the Wireless option adapts to
international frequency requirements in Europe.
The options are Disable (factory default) and Enable.
•
•
Auth Method. This feature allows the user to select the authentication
method used for the wireless network interface.
•
Open (factory default). Selects open authentication.
•
Shared. Selects shared key authentication.
WEP Key 1 through 4. These are the individual characters of the
encryption key. If the "WEP Key x Width" is set to 40 Bits, the key values
can be entered in the following 5 sub menus (BYTE 1, …, BYTE 5). If the
"WEP Key x Width" is set to 128 Bits, the key values can be entered in the
following 13 sub menus (BYTE 1, …, BYTE 13). The key values must
configure to match the corresponding key in the Access Point's key
configuration.
NOTE: The WEP Key Width is the number of bits used for encryption. This
can be set to either 40 Bits or 128 Bits and must match the Access
Point's configuration.
•
Default WEP Key. This feature enables you to encrypt (scramble)
information for security purposes. With this feature, you can set up to four
encryption keys, in either ASCII or hexadecimal format, and in either 40 or
128 bits. (The more bits you choose, the more difficult it will be to decode
the information.)
The default key must match the Access Point's configuration. If the
Access Point is configured to use "Open System", the default key should
be set to 0. If the Access Point is configured to use 40-bit or 128-bit WEP
encryption key, the encryption key must be set to the same setting as the
Access Point's setting. There are four keys (1-4) that an Access Point can
use. If the Access Point is set to use key 1, the default key must be set to
1 to correspond to the Access Point's setting.
NOTE: None of the WEP Key Configuration menus display on the
configuration printout.
•
134
Reset WEP Keys. Allows you to reset all four WEP keys (WEP Key 1
through WEP Key 4) at one time.
CONFIGURATION
Menu
INTERFACE Submenus
CONFIGURATION MENU
CONFIGURATION
(from page 67)
Save
Config.
1*
1 to 8
Load
Config.
1*
1 to 8
Factory
Name
Config 1 1
1*
2*
Name
Config 3 1
Name
Config 4 1
4*
Reset
Cfg Names
1*
1 to 8
All
Power-Up
Config.
Factory*
1 to 8
1*
1 to 8
3*
Name
Config 8 1
8*
Delete
Config.
Current*
Factory
Power-Up
All
1 to 8
Name
Config 2 1
Name
Config 7 1
7*
Print
Config
Protect
Configs.
Disable*
Enable
Name
Config 5 1
5*
Name
Config 6 1
6*
Auto Save
Enable*
Disable
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to
Enable (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
1
These menus allow the setting of a 15 character string.
135
Chapter
4
CONFIGURATION MENU
CONFIGURATION Submenus
Save Config
This option allows you to save up to eight unique configurations to meet
different print job requirements. This eliminates the need to change the
parameter settings for each new job. The configurations are stored in memory
and will not be lost if you turn off the printer. If the Protect Configs. parameter
is enabled, the new configuration will not be saved unless the existing
configuration has been deleted first. The Factory default configuration cannot
be changed and saved under the Factory menu, but can be changed and
saved as one of the eight unique configurations. See “Saving A Configuration”
on page 141 for details.
The factory default is 1.
Load Config
The printer can store up to eight configurations in memory. This parameter
allows you to select and load a specific configuration.
The options are 1 to 8 and Factory. The factory default is 1.
Print Config
This option is used to print a listing of various stored printer configurations.
We recommend you store printouts of your configurations in a safe place for
quick referral.
The options are Current (factory default), Factory, Power-Up, All, and 1 to 8.
Delete Config
You can delete one or all of your eight customized configurations. The factory
default configuration cannot be deleted.
The factory default is 1.
Power-Up Config
You can specify any one of nine configurations (1-8 saved custom
configurations or Factory) as the power-up configuration.
The factory default is Factory.
Protect Config
You can specify whether or not a new configuration should overwrite an
existing configuration when you activate the Save Configs. parameter. When
disabled (factory default), the new configuration will overwrite the existing
configuration. When enabled, the new configuration will not overwrite the
existing configuration, and the message “CONFIG. EXISTS / Delete First”
displays.
The factory default is Disable.
136
CONFIGURATION Submenus
Name Config 1 to Name Config 8
You may specify a 15-character name which can be used to refer to a
configuration. The name you enter for a configuration will be used in the Load
Config., Save Config., Print Config., Delete Config., and Power-Up Config.
menus. The names can only be cleared by using the Reset Cfg Names menu.
When you move into the Name Configs. menu, the middle line of the display
shows the current configuration name. The first character of the current
configuration name is highlighted.
Press ↑ or ↓ to cycle through the values available for that character at the
cursor location. Press → to move to the next character to be modified.
Press ← to go back to a character you have already modified. Continue until
you have entered the name you want to give to this configuration, then press
↵ to save. The name you entered will now represent this configuration on the
printer's front panel. To exit this menu without saving, press the
key. The
configuration name will revert to the last saved value.
The factory default is the configuration number.
Reset Cfg Names
You can reset specific configuration names back to the default value of the
configuration number. You can also reset all configuration names by selecting
All.
The options are 1 to 8 and All. The factory default is 1.
Auto Save
•
Enable (factory default). When a change has been made to a Config.
menu, this option automatically prompts the user to save or not save the
change to a Config #.
If you are currently in the Factory Config. menus and make a change,
pressing Enter saves to Config 1 or the next available Config. and
becomes the Power-Up Config. If the Current Config is Config 1 and a
menu change is made, pressing Enter will save the change to Config 1.
•
Disable. The printer will not prompt you to save any changes made.
137
Chapter
4
DIAGNOSTICS Menu
DIAGNOSTICS Menu
DIAGNOSTICS
(from page 67)
Print
Tests
Checkerboard*
Grey
Grid
Current Config
Left Test
Right Test
Combo Test
Ethernet Test 1
Barcode Demo
RFID Report 2
Clear
Error Log
PrintHead
Usage
XXXXX Inches
Software
Build
Test
Count
XXXXXX 3
5 Pages*
10 Pages
Continuous
1 Page
2 Pages
Feature
File 4
XXXXXX- XXX
Hex Dump
Mode
Print
Error Log
Disable*
Enable
FLASH
Installed
EMC FLASH
Installed 5
DRAM
Installed
Ptr On Time
Printer Usage
XX Megabytes 3
XX Megabytes 3
XX Megabytes 3
XXX.X Hours 3
XXXXX Inches 3
Reset Head
Data
Head
Resolution
Head
Voltage
Head
On Time
XX.X Hours 3
XXX DPI 3
XX.XX+X.XX volts 3
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable (in the PRINTER
SETUP menu).
1
This menu appears only if the Ethernet Interface adapter is installed.
2
This menu appears only if the RFID encoder is installed.
cannot change this value; it is a display only item.
4
This menu appears only if a Feature file is loaded.
5
This menu appears only if the EMC (Expanded Memory Cartridge) is installed.
3 You
138
DIAGNOSTICS Submenus
DIAGNOSTICS Submenus
Print Tests
The printer tests below allow you to check for proper printer operation and
print quality:
•
Checkerboard (factory default). This pattern helps identify marginal
printhead elements, quality of edge sharpness, and uneven print quality.
•
Grey. This pattern helps identify burned out printhead elements and
uneven print quality.
•
•
Grid. This pattern helps identify edge sharpness and uneven print quality.
•
Left Test. Prints a pattern containing a series of ladder-type bar code
symbols, starting with four and decrementing by one symbol on each print
until a single symbol prints on the left side. This pattern helps identify
ribbon wrinkle problems.
•
Right Test. Prints a pattern containing a series of ladder-type bar code
symbols, starting with four and decrementing by one symbol on each print
until a single symbol prints on the right side. This pattern helps identify
ribbon wrinkle problems.
•
•
Combo Test. Prints a combined left test and right test.
•
Barcode Demo. Prints text and barcodes with the barcodes positioned at
the left and right margins of the standard label media supplied with the
printer. The test automatically produces output for 4 inch printers at 203
dpi and 305 dpi.
•
RFID Report. This item appears only if the RFID encoder is installed.
Prints a report of RFID statistics since the printer was turned on or since
the last data reset.
Current Config. Prints the current printer configuration and helps identify
the text print quality. Also prints Printhead statistical data in the header.
Ethernet Test. This item appears only if the Network Interface Card (NIC)
adapter is installed. Prints the NIC statistics stored on the NIC adapter.
Once you have selected the desired test pattern, press ↵ to start printing. If
the Test Count option is set to Continuous (factory default), press ↵ again to
stop printing.
Test Count
This item selects the number of times the selected test pattern will be printed.
The options are 5 Pages (factory default), 10 Pages, Continuous, 1 Page, and
2 Pages.
Software Build
This is the reference number which includes the program file part number and
revision number of the software installed in the printer, e.g., 358186 V1.07G.
139
Chapter
4
DIAGNOSTICS Menu
Feature File
Displays the part number only when a feature file has been installed.
Hex Dump Mode
•
•
Disable (factory default).
Enable. The printer prints out data sent from the host in hexadecimal
format.
Print Error Log
Prints the current log of errors. Most non-routine faults (RIBBON FAULT,
PRINT HEAD HOT) are stored in the error log.
Clear Error Log
Clears entries in the error log.
FLASH Installed
Displays the amount of FLASH memory installed in megabytes.
EMC FLASH Installed
Displays the amount of EMC FLASH memory installed in megabytes.
DRAM Installed
Displays the amount of DRAM installed in megabytes.
Ptr On Time
Displays the cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on. This
value is set to zero at the factory after burn-in testing.
Printer Usage
Displays the cumulative number of inches the printer has moved media. This
value is set to zero at the factory after burn-in testing.
PrintHead Usage
Displays the length of media actually printed since the last Reset Head Data
operation. This value is set to zero at the factory after burn-in testing.
Head On Time
Displays the time that power has been applied to the printhead since the last
Reset Head Data operation. This value is set to zero at the factory after burnin testing.
140
Saving A Configuration
DIAGNOSTICS
Submenus
Reset Head Data
Resets all printhead statistics values (Head Prt Dist and Head On Time) to
zero.
Head Resolution
Displays the printhead resolution installed in dots per inch (203 dpi or
305 dpi).
Head Voltage
Displays the applied printhead voltage.
Saving A Configuration
You can save up to eight different configurations to meet eight unique print job
requirements. These configurations are saved and stored in the printer and
are not lost when the printer is turned off.
NOTE: If the Protect Config. option is enabled, the new configuration will not
be saved until the existing configuration is deleted.
Follow these steps to save a new configuration:
.
1. Press the ..
key to enter the menu configuration.
2. Press the Right key until CONFIGURATION displays.
CONFIGURATION
3. Press the ↵ key to enter the CONFIGURATION menu.
4. Press the Down key until the following option is selected:
Save Config.
1*
5. Press the Left or Right keys to cycle through the options (1-8).
NOTE: Factory is not listed because changes made to the factory
configuration cannot be saved under Factory.
141
Chapter
4
Auto Save Configuration
6. When the desired number displays, press the ↵ key to select it. The
following message displays briefly:
Saving
Configuration
When processing is completed, the display shows:
Save Config.
X*
NOTE: If the configuration number has been previously saved and Protect
Config. is enabled under the CONFIGURATION menu, the following
error message displays:
CONFIG. EXISTS
Delete First
If the above occurs, see “Modifying A Saved Configuration” on page 145,
step 4.
7. Print your configuration and store it in a safe place for future reference.
Refer to “Printing A Configuration” on page 146.
Auto Save Configuration
Auto Save Functionality
The Auto Save Configuration function is triggered when the operator has
made a change to a menu that is normally saved as part of a printer
configuration and attempts to go online without saving these changes to a
configuration.
NOTE: Menus that are automatically saved as part of the Printer Settings,
such as the Network Addresses, will not trigger the Auto Save
Configuration function.
The Auto Save Configuration function works with the active configuration. The
active configuration is the configuration that was last loaded or saved. When a
configuration is loaded, either as the Power-Up default, by the emulation’s
response to a host command, or by the operator from the front panel, that
configuration is the active configuration. If the operator saves a configuration
from the front panel, that configuration becomes the active configuration.
The Auto Save Configuration function will sometimes need to find an open
configuration. An open configuration is a configuration that has not yet been
used to save a configuration. The Auto Save Configuration function will start
with Configuration #1 and check each configuration to see if a configuration
142
Auto Save Configuration
DIAGNOSTICS
Submenus
has been saved in that configuration number. The first empty configuration
found is used as the open configuration.
The Auto Save Configuration cannot save a configuration to the Factory
Configuration. If the active configuration is the Factory Configuration then the
Auto Save Configuration function must find an open configuration into which
to save the active configuration.
To disable the Auto Save Configuration, set Auto Save (in the Configuration
menu) to Disable. The Auto Save menu displays only if Admin User is set to
Enable in the Printer Setup menu.
Auto Save Feature
When an operator has made a change to a menu and attempts to go Online
without saving the changes to a configuration, the following prompt displays:
Menu Changes Detected
Save Permanently
Save Temporarily
Cancel Changes
Restore Factory
Press ↵ to Select
The active option is highlighted. The operator can use the Up and Down keys
to scroll through the different options. The keys will loop at the top and bottom
options. The ↵ (Enter) key selects the highlighted option. The printer will go
Online after performing the selected option.
NOTE: Only the Up, Down, and Enter keys work at the Menu Changes
Detected prompt.
•
Save Permanently (default option). This option will cause the printer to
save the configuration to the active configuration and make the active
configuration the Power-Up default configuration. If the active
configuration is the Factory Configuration, the printer will save the
configuration to an open configuration and make that open configuration
the Power-Up default configuration.
If there is no open configuration, the operator must decide which
configuration to overwrite. In this case the printer will display the Save
Configuration menu, otherwise, the printer will go Online.
•
Save Temporarily. Menu changes will be implemented, but will not be
saved once the printer is powered off.
•
Cancel Changes. This option will cause the printer to reload the Active
Configuration and then go Online.
•
Restore Factory. This option will cause the printer to reload the Factory
Configuration and then go Online.
143
Chapter
4
Specifying A Power-Up Configuration
Specifying A Power-Up Configuration
You can specify any one of the nine configurations (1-8 or Factory) as the
power-up configuration:
.
1. Press the ..
key to enter the menu configuration.
2. Press the Right key until the following displays:
PRINTER SETUP
3. Press the ↵ key to enter the PRINTER SETUP menu.
4. Press the Up key until the following option is selected:
PRINTER SETUP
Admin User
5. Press the ↵ key to enter the Admin User submenu.
6. Press the Right key until the following displays:
Admin User
Enable
7. Press the ↵ key to select Enable. An asterisk appears after Enable.
Setting Admin User to Enable allows the user to see hidden submenus.
.
8. Press the ..
key go to the main menu.
9. Press the Right key until the following displays:
CONFIGURATION
10. Press the ↵ key to enter the CONFIGURATION menu.
11. Press the Down key until the following message displays:
Power-Up Config.
Factory*
12. Press the Left or Right keys to cycle through the options (1-8 and
Factory). When the desired number displays, press the ↵ key to select it.
The following message displays:
Power-Up Config.
X*
144
Modifying
A Saved Configuration
DIAGNOSTICS
Submenus
NOTE: If the configuration number has not been saved previously, the
following error message displays:
CONFIG. DOES NOT
EXIST/Save First
If this error message displays, see “Saving A Configuration” on
page 141. Once you have saved a configuration, repeat the steps in
this procedure.
Modifying A Saved Configuration
You can change a saved configuration by rewriting over it. For example, you
can modify Config. 1, shown below. Suppose you want to keep all the settings
but you want to select the parallel Centronics interface instead of the
IEEE 1284 interface.
1. Load the configuration to be changed (for example, Config. 1).
a. Press the
selected.
..
.
key to enter the menu configuration. MEDIA SETUP is
b. Press the Right key until the following displays:
CONFIGURATION
c.
Press the ↵ key to enter the CONFIGURATION menu.
d. Press the Down key until the following displays:
Load Config.
1*
e. Press the Left or Right keys to cycle through the options Factory, 1-8.
f.
When the desired number displays, press the ↵ key to select it. The
following message displays:
Loading Saved
Configuration
Then, the following message displays when it is loaded:
Load Config.
X*
2. Move through the menu and change all the desired values. (In this
example, press the ... key then the Right key until EMULATION
displays. Press the Right key until Select: IGL displays.
3. Press the ↵ key to select each new value. An asterisk (*) displays.
145
Chapter
4
Printing A Configuration
4. Before saving the modified configuration, you must delete the original
configuration if the Protect Config. option is enabled.
a. Press the Up or Down keys until the following message displays:
Delete Config.
1*
b. Press the Left or Right keys to cycle through the options (1-8).
When the desired number displays, press the ↵ key to select it.
The following message displays:
Deleting
Configuration
Then, the following displays when it is deleted:
Delete Config.
X*
5. Save the new configuration as described in the “Saving A Configuration”
on page 141. Make sure you select the same number (e.g., Config. 1)
when saving the modified configuration. The new configuration writes
over the existing one.
6. Print a copy of this newest configuration and store it in a safe place. Refer
to “Printing A Configuration” on page 146.
Printing A Configuration
We recommend that you print and store your configurations for future
reference. The printout provides a list of the parameters that were set when
you configured the printer.
To print a configuration:
1. Press the
..
.
key to enter the Main menu.
2. Press the Right key until the following message displays:
CONFIGURATION
3. Press the ↵ key to enter the CONFIGURATION menu.
4. Press the Down key until the following message displays:
Print Config.
Current*
146
Loading
A Saved Configuration
DIAGNOSTICS
Submenus
5. Press the Left or Right keys to cycle through the following printout
options:
Current*
Factory
Power-Up
All
1-8 customized configurations
6. When the desired option displays, press the ↵ key. The printer prints the
specified configuration.
NOTE: If the configuration you want to print has not been saved, the
following message displays momentarily:
CONFIG. DOES NOT
EXIST/Save First
This message indicates that no configuration menu has been saved
under the configuration value you have selected and therefore cannot
be printed. You must either select another configuration to print or
load and then save a configuration to that configuration value first.
Loading A Saved Configuration
To use a different configuration:
1. Press the
..
.
key to enter the Main menu.
2. Press the Right key until the following message displays:
CONFIGURATION
3. Press the ↵ key to enter the CONFIGURATION menu.
4. Press the Right key until the following message displays:
Load Config.
Current*
5. Press Left or Right keys until the desired configuration displays.
6. Press ↵. Loading Saved/Configuration displays.
NOTE: Only configurations that have previously been saved appear as
options in the Load Config menu. If no configurations have been
saved, the only option under Load Config will be Factory.
147
Chapter
148
4
Loading A Saved Configuration
5
Downloading Firmware
Loading Flash Memory
Flash memory is contained in a SIMM (single in-line memory module) located
on the controller PCBA. Printer control languages and printer operating
system software are loaded into flash memory at the factory, but there are
occasions when you may have to load this software:
•
•
You have replaced the controller PCBA
The customer needs to upgrade printer software
Emulation and operating system firmware are included as files on a CD-ROM
that comes with the printer. You can copy the appropriate file from the
CD-ROM to a computer’s hard disk, then download the file from the computer
into printer flash.
IMPORTANT
When downloading emulation and operating system firmware to the
printer, all other optional fonts, customer-supplied logos, setup files,
feature files, and TIFF files will be erased. You will then need to reload
those files. Before starting a download procedure, be sure that you have
all the necessary files on hand.
You can download firmware through the serial, parallel, USB or ethernet port
of the printer, and you can do it three ways:
•
If your computer can run Java™ programs, you can load software through
any printer port by using the Firmware Download Utility included on the
CD that comes with the printer. (See “Downloading Printer Firmware
Using The Firmware Download Utility” on page 150.)
•
You can use DOS commands to load software through the parallel port or
serial port. (See page 151.)
•
If the printer has the ethernet NIC (network interface card) installed, you
can load firmware through the ftp utility and ethernet port.
(See page 154.)
149
Chapter
5
Downloading Printer Firmware Using The Firmware Download Utility
Downloading Printer Firmware Using
The Firmware Download Utility
The Firmware Download Utility (FDU) allows you to load program files into the
printer with an easy to use graphical interface. The FDU is a utility program
included on the CD that comes with the printer. It can be used on computers
running the Windows or UNIX® (such as Linux® or Solaris™) operating
systems. With the FDU, you can choose the printer port through which to load
firmware (all are supported), configure the port, and initiate the download.
NOTE: The FDU is a Java-based program, so you need the Java 2 Platform,
Standard Edition (J2SE™) Java Runtime Environment (JRE) installed
on your computer. The Windows version of the J2SE JRE is included
on the CD that comes with the printer in the form of an executable file
(.exe). Copy this file to your computer and double-click it; it will
self-extract and install the J2SE JRE on your computer.
NOTE: If you have a Linux or Solaris system, you can download the J2SE
JRE for your system from http://java.sun.com/j2se.
If you have another UNIX system, see your system administrator.
Conditions for use of the included Java Software are set forth in the Sun
Microsystems Binary Code License Agreement
(http://java.com/en/download/license.jsp). In the event of any conflicting
terms, the Binary Code License Agreement controls.
1. Make a configuration printout of all saved configurations. (Refer to
“Saving A Configuration” on page 141.)
2. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
3. Disconnect the data (signal) cable(s) from the printer interface
connectors.
4. Connect a printer data cable to the parallel, serial, or ethernet port of the
computer you will use to download the software.
5. Connect the printer data cable to the appropriate I/O port of the printer.
6. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the ↵ (Enter) and
(Cancel) keys. Without releasing the keys, power the printer on. When
you see the power-up splash screen on the LCD, release the keys.
7. Wait until you see “Status: Firmware Download Mode” on the LCD before
doing the next step. This can take about a minute to appear, depending
on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer.
8. On your computer, create a directory named download at the root level
of the hard drive (e.g., C:\download on a Windows computer).
9. Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer’s CD-ROM
drive.
10. Copy the FDU.jar file from the CD-ROM to your computer.
11. Open the readme.txt file on the CD-ROM.
150
12. Identify which emulation set you want to load into the printer and note the
filename that corresponds to that emulation. The filename is a six digit
number plus .exe or .prg. For example: 123456.exe or 123456.prg
This is the file you will download into the printer.
13. Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 8.
14. Double-click the FDU.jar file (for command line prompt users, type
java -jar fdu.jar<Enter>). It will launch in its own window. Use the
FDU to enter the emulation part number, to select the I/O connection and
its corresponding settings, and to initiate the download.
IMPORTANT
Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will leave the printer’s flash memory
incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
15. When the new firmware has successfully loaded into flash memory and
the printer has reset itself, set the printer power switch to O (Off).
16. Remove the CD-ROM from your computer and store it away safely.
17. If required, reconnect the data input cable(s) to the printer.
18. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
19. Using the configuration printout(s) you made in step 1, page 150, restore
the printer configurations. (Refer to “Loading A Saved Configuration” on
page 147.)
Downloading Printer Firmware Through
The Parallel Or Serial Port Using DOS
1. Make a configuration printout of all saved configurations. (Refer to
“Printing A Configuration” on page 146.)
2. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
3. Disconnect the data (signal) cable(s) from the printer interface
connectors.
4. Connect a parallel data printer cable to the LPT1 port or a serial data
printer cable to the COM1 port of an IBM-compatible computer running
the Windows (95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, or XP) operating system.
NOTE: You can connect the cable to the LPT2 port if the LPT1 port is in use.
The load command is different if you use this port, so make sure you
use the LPT2 commands in step 15.
Software loads at 9600 baud if you load through the serial port with a
DOS command. This can take a long time. Software loads much
faster through the parallel port.
5. Connect the data cable to the appropriate I/O port of the printer.
6. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the ↵ (Enter) and
(Cancel) keys. Without releasing the keys, power the printer on. When
you see the power-up splash screen on the LCD, release the keys.
151
Chapter
5
Downloading Printer Firmware Through The Parallel Or Serial Port Using
7. Wait until you see “Status: Firmware Download Mode” on the LCD before
doing the next step. This can take about a minute to appear, depending
on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer.
8. Using Windows Explorer, create a directory named download at the root
level of your C: hard drive (C:\download).
9. Insert the printer emulation software CD-ROM into your computer’s CDROM drive.
10. Open the readme.txt file on the CD-ROM.
11. Identify which emulation set you want to load into the printer and note the
filename that corresponds to that emulation. The filename is a six digit
number plus .exe. For example: 123456.exe
This is the file you will download into the printer.
12. Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 8.
13. Start a command prompt session. (The Start Menu icon is usually labeled
MS-DOS® Prompt or Command Prompt.)
14. At the command prompt type:
C:<Enter>
cd \download<Enter>
15. To load the file through the LPT1 parallel port on the computer, type the
following at the command prompt on the computer:
filename.exe -pb<Enter>
where filename.exe is the file name you noted in step 11. This command
decompresses the file on the hard drive and copies it as a binary file into
the flash memory on the printer controller board.
NOTE: When you power up in download mode (step 6) the printer is ready to
accept data from all ports. When the printer receives data from one of
the ports (based on the load command you give) the other ports shut
down.
IMPORTANT
Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will leave the printer’s flash memory
incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
While the file is copied into memory, the printer LCD informs you of the
load process and status.
16. When the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and
the printer has reset itself, set the printer power switch to O (Off).
17. Remove the CD-ROM from the host computer and store it away safely.
18. If required, reconnect the data input cable(s) to the printer.
19. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
20. Using the configuration printout(s) you made in step 1 on page 151,
restore the printer configurations. (Refer to “Loading A Saved
Configuration” on page 147.)
152
Downloading Printer Firmware If
Flash Contains Corrupt Code
If the flash memory contains only boot code (e.g., if it is new), or if a download
was interrupted (e.g., by a power outage), you must download software
through the printer’s parallel port using the three-key initialization sequence
covered in this section.
1. Make sure the printer’s parallel port is available. In some configurations,
you may have to re-install the Centronics® I/O cable to load basic
software into the printer.
2. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
3. Disconnect the data (signal) cable(s) from the printer interface
connectors.
4. Connect a parallel data printer cable to the LPT1 port or LPT2 port of an
IBM-compatible computer running the Windows (95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, or
XP) operating system.
5. Connect the data cable to the Centronics port of the printer.
6. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the
, Down key, and
↵ keys. Without releasing the keys, power the printer on. When you see
“B20: Firmware Download” on the LCD, release the keys.
7. Using Windows Explorer, create a directory named download at the root
level of your C: hard drive. (C:\download)
8. Insert the printer emulation software CD-ROM into your computer’s CDROM drive.
9. Open the readme.txt file on the CD-ROM.
10. The filename is a six digit number plus .exe. For example: 123456.exe
This is the file you will download into the printer.
11. Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 7.
12. Start a command prompt session. (The Start Menu icon is usually labeled
MS-DOS Prompt or Command Prompt.)
13. At the command prompt type:
C:<Enter>
cd \download<Enter>
14. To load the file through the LPT1 parallel port on the computer, type the
following at the command prompt on the computer:
filename.exe -pb<Enter>
where filename.exe is the file name you noted in step 11. This command
decompresses the file on the hard drive and copies it as a binary file into
the flash memory on the printer controller board.
15. When the software has successfully loaded into flash memory and the
printer has reset itself, set the printer power switch to O (Off).
16. Starting at step 6, page 151, repeat the “Downloading Printer Firmware
Through The Parallel Or Serial Port Using DOS” procedure. (In other
words, use the two-key method to load software again.) This ensures that
all necessary code is loaded into printer memory.
153
Chapter
5
Downloading Printer Firmware Via The ftp Utility and Printronix Network
Downloading Printer Firmware Via The ftp Utility and
Printronix Network Interface Card
The file transfer protocol utility, called “ftp” is part of many host computer
operating systems, including Windows (95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, XP) systems.
Ftp can be used to send files to the Printronix Network Inteface Card (NIC).
The file to be sent to the printer must be present on the host computer, in a
known location. The IP address, user name and password, and print queue
must be known. The IP address depends on the user’s network. The NIC has
a default user name of “root” and no password. The print queue name of
d1prn may be used unless it has been changed.
To send a file using ftp on a Windows system, do the following steps.
The phrase <Enter> means to press the Enter key.
1. Verify that the printer is ready to receive data. When loading a file into
flash memory, the printer should be in download mode. For ordinary label
printing, the printer should be Online.
Placing the Printer in Download Mode
a. Turn the printer off and wait for 10 seconds.
b. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the ↵ (Enter) and
(Cancel) keys. Without releasing the keys, power the printer on.
When you see the power-up splash screen on the on the LCD,
release the keys.
c.
Wait until you see “Status: Firmware Download Mode” on the LCD
before doing the next step. This can take about a minute to appear,
depending on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer.
2. Open a DOS window, sometimes known as an MS-DOS Prompt or a
Command Prompt.
3. In the DOS window, change to the directory or folder containing the file
that is to be sent.
Verify that the file is present by using the DOS command dir.
4. Start the ftp program by typing ftp <Enter>.
5. Open a session to the NIC IP address by typing
open xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx<Enter>
Use the actual NIC IP address.
6. Log in with a user name and password (use defaults for this example).
root <Enter><Enter>
a. Type root as the default user name and press <Enter>
b. By default, there is no password. Press <Enter>.
If a user name or password is assigned, use them instead.
7. Inform the NIC of the working directory and destination (queue) name.
a. Type cd dest<Enter>
b. Type cd d1prn<Enter>
154
8. Set the transfer mode. Select binary mode for flash downloads.
Type bin<Enter>
9. Start the file transfer.
Type put xxxxx.xxx<Enter>.
Use the actual file name in place of xxxxx.xxx.
10. Wait for ftp to indicate the download is complete.
Print jobs (not flash downloads) only
It is possible to send additional print jobs by repeating steps 9 and 10.
Flash downloads only
Flash downloads will reset the printer when the file transfer is finished, and ftp
will be unavailable until the printer is online again.
11. End ftp when the file transfer is complete. For flash downloads, wait until
the printer is online again.
Type quit<Enter>
12. Close the DOS window.
155
Chapter
5
Downloading Printer Firmware Through USB
Downloading Printer Firmware Through USB
Normally the Host communicates with the printer’s USB port with a Windows
Driver. The Windows Driver cannot be used to transfer binary data to the
printer, such as the data contained in a Program Download. To do a Program
Download through the USB Port perform the following steps:
1. Make the printer sharable on the Host PC. This is done through the
Printer Setting Window on the PC. Make note of the Printers Shared
name.
2. Open a Dos Window on the PC. At the command prompt type:
NET USE LPT1\\COMP_NAME\Printers_Shared_Name /Persistent:YES
This command should be all on the same line. It redirects output on LPT1
to the shared printer.
COMP_NAME is the computer name found on the system settings.
Printers_Shared_Name is the shared name found in the printer
Properties\Sharing tab.
3. To check status of connection type:
Net View \\COMP_NAME
COMP_NAME is the computer name found on the system settings.
Now the printer is ready.
4. Use the COPY command to send the program file to the printer. Type:
COPY /b <File Name> lpt1:
5. To stop using LPT1 for USB, type:
NET USE LPT1 /DELETE
156
Downloading Optional Fonts to Flash Memory
Optional fonts are stored on a 3.5 inch floppy diskette that contains file names
comprised of a part number with a .dwn extension. You will insert this diskette
in your IBM-compatible computer and use either the parallel, serial, or
ethernet port to download the desired font(s) to the printer’s flash memory.
See Table 13 for a list of optional fonts and their corresponding part numbers.
Table 13. Optional Fonts
Font Name
Part Number
Antique Olive
706612-001
Avante Garde
706617-001
Baskerville
706606-001
Caslon
706613-001
CG Bodoni
706610-001
CG Century
706598-001
CG Times
706597-001
CG Times International
706614-001
CG Triumvirate
706596-001
CG Triumvirate Condensed
706607-001
Chart
706601-001
Decorative 1
706611-001
Decorative 2
706618-001
Decorative 3
706615-001
Decorative 5
706616-001
Desktop
706603-001
Futura II
706605-001
Garamond
706604-001
Gill Sans
706595-001
ITC Galliard
706608-001
ITC Century
706609-001
Label #1
706599-001
Label #2
706600-001
Office
706602-001
Univers
706594-001
157
Chapter
5
Downloading Optional Fonts to Flash Memory
Download Optional Fonts Via The Parallel or Serial Port
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
2. Connect a parallel data cable to the LPT1 port or a serial cable to the
COM1 port of an IBM-compatible computer running the Windows (95, 98,
Me, NT, 2000, or XP) operating system.
NOTE: You can connect the cable to the LPT2 port on the computer if the
LPT1 port is already in use. The load commands are different if you
use this port, as described in the notes after step 13.
3. Verify that the data cable is connected to the appropriate I/O port on the
printer and to the host computer.
4. Power on the computer and allow it to boot up.
5. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the ↵ (Enter) and
(Cancel) keys. Without releasing the keys, power the printer on.
Continue holding down the ↵ and
keys.
6. When you see the power-up splash screen on the LCD, release the
↵ and
(Cancel) keys.
7. Wait until you see “Status: Firmware Download Mode” on the LCD before
proceeding. This can take about a minute to appear, depending on the
emulations and interfaces installed in the printer.
8. Insert the optional font diskette into diskette drive A (or B) of the
computer.
9. Start a command prompt session. (The Start Menu icon is usually labeled
MS-DOS Prompt or Command Prompt.)
10. Make the diskette drive the active drive by typing:
A:<Enter> (if the diskette is in drive B, type B:<Enter>)
11. List the contents of the diskette at the command prompt by typing the
following:
dir<Enter>
You will see a directory listing containing files with a .dwn extension, e.g.,
94021.dwn, 94022.dwn, 94023.dwn.
12. Make note of the file name with the .dwn extension of each file you want
to download to the printer.
NOTE: The numeric portion of the file name will match the numbers of the
font typefaces listed in Appendix F of the PGL Programmer’s
Reference Manual and provide you with a description and print
sample of the typeface.
158
Download Optional Fonts Via The Parallel or Serial Port
13. At the command prompt type:
copy /b filename.dwn LPT1<Enter>
(where filename.dwn is file name you noted in step 12.)
NOTE: If you are loading the file using the LPT2 port on the computer, type
the following command:
copy /b filename.dwn LPT2<Enter>
(where filename.dwn is a file you noted in step 12.)
If you are loading the file using the serial port on the computer, type
the following commands:
mode COM1:9600,N,8,1,P<Enter>
copy /b filename.dwn COM1<Enter>
(where filename.dwn is a file you noted in step 12.)
The 9600 baud rate is the only selection some systems can use. The
baud rate information entered in the above commands must match the
Baud Rate setting (in the SERIAL PORT menu) saved in the Power-Up
Config.
You can download the optional fonts one at a time by entering one file
name per the copy command or you can copy multiple files in one copy
command.
To download one file at a time, enter the following at the command
prompt:
copy /b filename.dwn LPT1<Enter>
To download multiple files, enter the following at the command prompt,
for example:
copy /b filename1.dwn+filename2.dwn+...LPT1<Enter>
14. While the font file is copied into flash memory, the printer LCD informs
you of the load process and status. When the new file is successfully
loaded into memory, the printer will reset itself and go online.
15. To verify that the optional fonts have been downloaded:
NOTE: Admin User must be set to Enable in the PRINTER SETUP menu.
a. Perform a configuration printout.
— OR —
b. Select PRINTER SETUPMain FFSView File List. The new file
names will appear with the same part number file name you
downloaded, but with an .sf extension.
NOTE: The optional font typefaces cannot be selected via the printer control
panel. They can only be selected via a software command from the
host.
16. Press (Pause) key to place the printer online and return the printer to
normal operation.
159
Chapter
5
Labeling Applications
Download Optional Fonts Via The Ethernet Using ftp
Printronix offers scalable fonts as optional sets of four or more files. The fonts
are provided on MS-DOS formatted 3.5 diskettes. The files on the diskettes
have a .DWN extension, indicating they have a header allowing them to be
downloaded into flash memory. When the fonts have been loaded into the
printer flash memory, they will have a .SF extension for “scalable font.”
These fonts are used by programming languages as IGP/PGL or LP+
Superset. They have file names that are font numbers. See the IGP/PGL
Programmer’s Reference Manual, Appendix F, for a description and print
sample.
Loading a file with a .DWN extension is considered a flash download
operation. To load this type of file, put the printer into download mode, and
then transfer the file in binary (i.e. not an ASCII text file) mode.
•
•
See “Placing the Printer in Download Mode” on page 154.
To use Ethernet and ftp utility to transfer the file, see “Downloading
Printer Firmware Via The ftp Utility and Printronix Network Interface Card”
on page 154. Follow the instructions for flash download operation.
Once loaded, the fonts will be visible in a configuration listing or in a View File
List menu option. It may be necessary to enable Admin User to see the View
File List menu. The font files will be shown with extension .SF for “scalable
font.”
Labeling Applications
A TrueType font can be downloaded through several labeling applications,
such as Codesoft, Loftware, and Bartender. Please contact the appropriate
company for more details.
Using Downloaded TrueType Fonts
After downloading the TrueType font using any of the following methods, the
user can access the downloaded TrueType fot by using the FONT;NAME
command as described in the PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.
For Example:
~CREATE;FORM
FONT;NAME ARIAL.TTF
ALPHA
10;10;2;2;$01234$
STOP
END
~EXECUTE;FORM;1
160
Printronix Windows Driver
Downloading TrueType Fonts
There are several ways to download TrueType fonts to your printer. Once a
TrueType font is downloaded, it will be stored in the Flash file system as a
resident font. Regardless of printer power cycles, the downloaded font will
stay in the printer until the user deletes it. The user can find the list of all
printer resident fonts under PRINTER SETUPMain FFSView File List
after enabling Admin User in the PRINTER SETUP menu. To delete a
downloaded font from the Flash file system, the user should select the font
under PRINTER SETUPMain FFSDelete File List and then select
PRINTER SETUPOptimize & Reboot.
Printronix Windows Driver
A TrueType font can be downloaded from a PC through the Printronix
Windows Driver.
1. Load the Printronix Windows driver provided with your printer on the
Manuals and Utilities CD on Windows 2000/XP.
2. Once the printer driver is installed on the PC, right-click the printer driver
and select Properties.
3. Click the TT Font Download tab to access all the available system
TrueType fonts.
4. Select the TrueType font(s) from the Available System TrueType Fonts
pane you want to download.
5. Click the Download button to download font(s) to the printer while it is
online.
161
Chapter
5
Downloading TrueType Fonts
Create And Send Download File – Online (PGL Only)
A TrueType font can be loaded by creating a file that appends a PGL
command to the font and then sending that file to the printer. Use the PGL
FONTLOAD command:
~FONTLOAD;FontName;FontSize;Location
where
FontName - TrueType font name, e.g. arial.ttf
FontSize - TrueType font size, e.g. file size for arial.ttf
Location - Specify the download location to Flash
EMC - Specify the download location to EMC.
For example:
~FONTLOAD;arial.ttf;60548;DISK
Insert binary data of arial.ttf here...
END
After the file is created, it can be copied to the appropriate I/O port of the
printer while the printer is online, just like any other print file (for example:
copy/b filename.ext 1pt1).
Create And Send Download File – Download Mode
A TrueType font can be converted to a downloadable format by appending a
header to the font file using the cnvt2fls.exe utility.
1. Start a Command prompt window.
2. Copy cnvt2fls.exe and addtthdr.bat from your startup CD to your working
directory.
3. In your working directory, include the TrueType font file in .ttf format
(e.g., arial.ttf).
4. Convert the TrueType font file .ttf to a downloadable format .dwn with the
following command: addtthdr (filename without extension).
5. Put the printer in download mode as described in the “Downloading
Optional Font Files To Flash Memory” section.
6. Send the downloadable font file (e.g., arial.dwn) to the printer through the
appropriate I/O port of the printer.
162
Using PTX_SETUP
Using PTX_SETUP
PTX_SETUP can be used to load TrueType fonts into the file system. Please
see the PTX_SETUP chapter in the PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual for
details.
Example:
!PTX_SETUP
FILE_IO-CAPTURE; “ARIAL.TTF”.
PTX_END
Arial TrueType font binary data
NOTE: Do not add any LF/FF at the end of the binary data
!PTX_SETUP
FILE_IO-CAPTURE;””.
PTX_END
163
Chapter
164
5
Downloading TrueType Fonts
6
Routine Care And
Troubleshooting
Cleaning
Depending on the media used, the printer may accumulate residues (media
dust, adhesives, etc.) as a by-product of normal printing. To maintain top
printing quality, you should remove these residues by cleaning the printer
periodically.
Exterior Cleaning
Clean the exterior surfaces with a clean, lint-free cloth. If necessary, use a
mild detergent or desktop cleaning solution.
NOTE: Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or solvents.
Interior Cleaning
Clean the interior of the printer by removing any dirt and lint with a softbristled, non-metallic brush. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove the residue.
General Cleaning
Periodically clean all rollers, guides, and assemblies. Use low pressure air to
remove dust in the printer. Use isopropyl alcohol and a cotton swab to clean
any areas where media dust, adhesives, etc. have accumulated.
165
Chapter
6
Cleaning
Cleaning The Printhead, Platen Roller And Media
Sensors
NOTE: You do not need to turn off the printer before cleaning the printhead,
platen roller, or media sensors.
Printhead Cleaning
As you use your printer, the printhead may become dirty which can result in
poor print quality. Clean the printhead each time you install new ribbon
(thermal transfer print mode) or install new media (direct thermal print mode).
Clean the printhead with a cotton swab and isopropyl alcohol supplied with
the printer.
By keeping your printhead clean, you will help maintain its life.
Platen Roller Cleaning
Media dust and adhesive residue on the platen roller can degrade print quality
and cause voids in your label image. Clean the platen roller at the same time
as the printhead.
Use a small amount of isopropyl alcohol on a lint free cloth to clean the platen
roller. With the pivoting deck open, the platen roller can be rotated forward by
hand to access and clean its entire surface area.
Media Sensor Cleaning
CAUTION
Do not use solvents or abrasive agents to clean the media sensors.
They can damage sensor lens covers.
The lower media sensor should be cleaned to ensure reliable TOF and Paper
Out sensing. Clean the media sensor at the same time as the printhead.
The lower media sensor can be wiped clean using a soft cloth or swab with
isopropyl alcohol. Remove media dust by vacuuming or blowing air across the
lens cover.
166
Cleaning The Printhead, Platen Roller And Media Sensors
Printhead
Heating Elements
(underneath, not
shown)
A
Deck Lock
Lever
Printhead
Assembly
Media Sensor
Assembly
Printhead
Release Lever
Platen Roller
A
Print
Element
Figure 3. Cleaning the Printhead, Platen Roller, and Media Sensors
167
Chapter
6
Cleaning
1. Rotate the deck lock lever counterclockwise to open the pivoting deck
and remove any media and ribbon (if loaded) to gain access to the
printhead heating elements area.
2. Gently rub a cotton swab with Isopropyl alcohol across the printhead
heating elements (light brown area).
3. Allow the printhead to dry for one minute before reloading the media and
ribbon.
4. Clean the platen roller.
5. Clean the media sensors with a soft cloth.
Cutter Option Cleaning
The cutter requires only periodic cleaning.
WARNING
Keep your fingers away from the cutter blade. It is sharp.
Perform the following procedure whenever too much dust or debris is visible.
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
2. Rotate the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise until the pivoting deck
swings upward.
3. Open the cutter cover by sliding the cutter cover release lever to the right.
4. Use a cloth with a light amount of WD-40 oil to clean adhesive from the
cutter guides. Adhesive oil must be cleaned from the guides with a dry
cloth to prevent dust attraction.
5. Loosen the thumbscrew on the right side of the front panel and swing it
open.
6. Use a vacuum or can of compressed air with a nozzle around the area of
the cutter blade to remove any dust or debris.
7. Use a cloth with a light amount of WD-40 oil to clean adhesive from the
cutter blade. Adhesive oil must be cleaned from the blade and guides with
a dry cloth to prevent dust attraction.
CAUTION
Do not use isopropyl alcohol to clean the cutter blade – it dissolves oils
required for lubrication.
8. Close the front panel and tighten the screw.
9. Properly route the media through the printer and cutter.
10. Close the cutter cover.
11. Close the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise.
12. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
13. Test the printer cutting operation by selecting one of the test patterns to
print. Select Printer Tests in the DIAGNOSTICS menu
(see “DIAGNOSTICS Menu” on page 138).
168
Improving Processing Time
Printer Tests
A sequence of automatic tests is performed during printer power-up. If any
faults are detected at that time, a fault message will display.
Before setting the printer for online operation, run a test print. The printer tests
option has various tests which allow you to check for proper printer operation
and print quality.
You can print test patterns from the DIAGNOSTICS menu. For more
information, see page 139.
NOTE: Before attempting to print test labels, you must set up the printer for
the type of media installed. See “MEDIA SETUP Menu” on page 68.
for more information.
Troubleshooting Common Situations
Occasionally, situations occur that require some troubleshooting skill.
Possible problem situations and potential solutions are listed in this section.
While not every conceivable situation is addressed here, you may find some
of these tips helpful. Contact a qualified service technician for problems that
persist or are not covered in this section.
Improving Processing Time
Before looking at solutions for decreasing processing time and increasing
throughput, it may help to understand what happens during processing. When
the printer receives a format command, it enters the label formatting mode.
Label formatting requires time to process the label data into the printer
buffers.
The time required varies, depending on the complexity of the label format and
on the size of the area being printed. Once the data has been mapped into
memory, the printer will start printing as many labels as requested by the
quantity command. In most cases, there is no delay between labels, however,
when using Label Peel-Off media handling, the printer stops between each
label and waits for the label to be removed.
169
Chapter
6
Troubleshooting Common Situations
Data Exchange
Many things can cause data loss or communications problems. This section
suggests some ways to isolate these problems and determine their cause.
Handshaking
Handshaking is the exchange of signals between two computers (or a
computer and a peripheral input or output device) to indicate the status of the
data being transferred. In the serial mode, the printer uses both hardware and
software handshaking and transmits both forms simultaneously when the
input buffer is full.
The printer can be used with either serial, parallel, USB, or optional NIC host
interfaces. Parallel interfaces are usually straightforward, with no special
settings required. Serial interfaces; however, have a variety of possible
communication parameter settings. The two methods of handshaking that can
be used, hardware and software, are explained below.
•
Hardware Handshaking
This electrical signal is controlled by the logic state on pin 4 of the serial
interface connector J2 (at the back of the printer). The signal will go high
when the printer is ready to receive data. The signal will go low when the
printer is in the busy state, which indicates that the printer input buffer is
full and can no longer receive data.
•
Software Handshaking
XON and XOFF are software signals that control serial data flow between
the printer and the host system. When the printer input buffer is full, the
printer transmits an XOFF (CTRL S) character that signals the host to
stop sending data. When memory space becomes available in the input
buffer, the printer sends an XON (CTRL Q) character, which tells the host
that the printer is ready to receive more data.
If the printer appears to have communication problems, the self-test
configuration test labels (see page 139) and character hex dump mode (see
page 140) should be checked. The tests can help identify printer configuration
errors that can cause problems.
Both of these test procedures are covered in this chapter. Configuration items
to check include the following:
170
•
Check that the data string being sent to the printer contains the correct
information.
•
Verify that the correct host interface port is being used and that the
communication parameters match those of the host (e.g., baud rate,
parity, etc.).
•
Verify that the correct interface cable is installed between the host and the
printer.
Controlling Print Quality
Controlling Print Quality
Four factors have the greatest effect on print quality:
•
•
•
•
The amount of heat applied by the printhead elements (print intensity)
The speed at which media is moving under the printhead (print speed)
The amount of printhead pressure (see page 41 to 44).
Media and ribbon compatibility (see page 228 to page 230).
For example, low-cost direct thermal media often has very high reaction
temperatures, which means that it takes a great deal of heat to make a clear
image. Resin ribbons and film media may require higher print intensity for a
quality image. Resin ribbons usually transfer images better on smooth
surfaced film or polyester labels but do not work as well on rougher textured
paper labels.
The printer has two ways to increase the heat of printhead elements:
•
Running the printer slower by changing the print speed via the host or the
MEDIA SETUP menu.
•
Setting the print intensity to a higher value with the Print Intensity function,
accessed via the host or through the MEDIA SETUP menu. This causes
more heat to be transferred into the media, thereby generating a darker
image.
Also, the printhead should be cleaned frequently to ensure that foreign
material does not accumulate on the printhead and interfere with heat
transfer. If smears, voids, or white lines appear in the printed form, the
printhead should be cleaned with a cotton swab and isopropyl alcohol
(see Figure 3 on page 167).
The cleaning should be done as a matter of routine whenever you install a
new ribbon (thermal transfer mode) or when you install new media (direct
thermal mode).
Determining Printhead Wear
The most common signs of a worn printhead are fixed vertical streaks that are
always the same size and in the same place on the printout. To determine if
vertical streaks are caused by a worn printhead, follow these methods:
1. Clean the printhead thoroughly with a cotton swab and isopropyl alcohol.
Test again for vertical streaks.
2. Remove the printhead (see page 172) and examine it for contamination
or damage such as scratches, dents, or other marks on the light brown
area containing the heating elements. Clean and install it, then test again
for vertical streaks.
3. Load an alternate roll of media. Test again for vertical streaks.
4. Load an alternate roll of ribbon. Test again for vertical streaks.
If after performing all these tests you still see fixed vertical streaks, you must
replace the printhead.
171
Chapter
6
Replacing The Printhead
Replacing The Printhead
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
WARNING
Always unplug the printer power cord from the printer or power outlet
before doing any installation procedure. Failure to remove power could
result in injury to you and damage the equipment. When applicable, you
will be instructed to apply power.
2. Unplug the printer power cord from the printer or the AC power source.
3. Disconnect the data signal cable(s) from the printer interface(s).
4. Remove the ribbon and media (e.g., paper, label, or tag stock material).
Pivoting Deck
Deck Lock
Lever
Printhead
Controller Cable
Assembly
Printhead
Release Lever
Release Tab
Printhead
Assembly
Power Supply
Cable Assembly
Figure 4. Replacing the Printhead Assembly
CAUTION
Oils from your hands can damage the light brown area (heating
elements) of the printhead. Do not touch the light brown area when you
handle the printhead assembly.
5. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully
counterclockwise. The pivoting deck will swing upward, exposing the
bottom of the printhead assembly.
172
ReplacingPrinthead
The Printhead
Determining
Wear
CAUTION
To prevent electrostatic damage to electronic components, ground
yourself by touching an unpainted part of the printer frame before
handling and installing the printhead.
6. Touch an unpainted part of the printer frame before touching the
printhead.
7. Press the printhead release lever and lower the old printhead.
8. Push the release tab down on the power supply cable assembly and
remove the cable from the printhead assembly.
9. Remove the printhead controller cable assembly from the printhead
assembly.
Arrow(2)
Support
Shaft
Printhead
Controller Cable
Assembly
Pivoting Deck
Printhead
Release Lever
Printhead
Power Supply
Cable Assembly
Notch(2)
10. Position the new printhead below the pivoting deck and connect the
printhead controller and power supply cable assemblies.
11. Lift the printhead upward into the pivoting deck.
12. Align the left printhead notch with the arrow on the left side of the pivoting
deck and snap it onto the support shaft.
13. Align the right printhead notch with the arrow on the right side of the
pivoting deck and snap it onto the support shaft.
14. Make sure that the cable assemblies do not extend past the printhead
cover and into the media or ribbon path.
15. Align the new printhead (see “Media Thickness Adjustment” on page 41
or “Printhead Alignment” on page 43).
173
Chapter
6
Restore The Printer To Operation
Restore The Printer To Operation
1. Inspect the light brown area of the printhead for smudges or fingerprints.
If necessary, gently clean the light brown area with a soft, lint-free cloth
(or a cotton swab) moistened with isopropyl alcohol.
2. Install the ribbon and media (e.g., paper, label, or tag stock material).
3. Close the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise.
(Figure 4.)
4. Close the media cover.
5. Plug the AC power cord into the printer and the power source.
6. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
7. Press
..
.
to place the printer in Menu mode.
8. Press the Down + ↵ (Enter) keys at the same time until “ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED” displays.
9. Press the Right key until DIAGNOSTICS displays.
10. Press ↵ to enter the DIAGNOSTICS menu.
11. Press the Down key until Reset Head Data displays.
NOTE: Admin User under the PRINTER SETUP menu must be set to Enable
for Reset Head Data to appear.
12. Press ↵ to select Reset Head Data. The message “RESETTING/HEAD
DATA” displays. (This sets the Head Print Distance and Head On Time
values to zero.)
13. Test printer operation and check print quality by selecting the
DIAGNOSTICS → Printer Tests menu and printing one of the test
patterns. (Refer to page 139.)
174
Solving Other Printer Problems
Solving Other Printer Problems
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions
Symptom
Communications Failures.
Solution/Explanation
1. Check the interface cable.
2. Check the configuration to ensure the correct interface is
enabled.
3. Verify the printer is receiving data by viewing the flashing
Online indicator on the control panel.
CONTROL PANEL
LCD message display is
illuminated and the printer
appears to be working, but
nothing is printing.
1. Verify that the labels are the correct type (direct or thermal
transfer).
2. If using direct thermal media, check that the media is
loaded with the direct thermal side facing up.
3. Check that the transfer ribbon is correctly routed. Route
transfer ribbon with ink side down as it passes under the
printhead.
4. Check that the printhead assembly is properly closed by
making sure the printhead latch is fully engaged.
5. Verify that the ribbon and media are compatible;
incompatibility can cause extremely light printing. Match
the ribbon to the type of media being used.
6. Check that the Print Intensity is correct. Set the Print
Intensity in the MEDIA SETUP menu or via the host
software.
7. Check that the Label Width parameter value does not
exceed the width of the media installed. Set the Label
Width in the MEDIA SETUP menu.
8. Run the Checkerboard test print pattern from the
DIAGNOSTICS menu. Note any imbalance of the print on
the page. The printhead pressure may need adjustment.
9. Remove the printhead completely and re-install it ensuring
the cables are correctly seated.
ATTENTION! status indicator
is flashing.
1. When the status indicator light is flashing, check the LCD
for a specific fault message. If a fault message displays,
refer to Table 15, Fault Messages on page 182.
2. Check for an Out-of-Media condition or missing labels in
the middle of a roll. Load the correct media.
3. Check that the ribbon and label stock are correctly routed.
Load ribbon and label stock correctly.
175
Chapter
6
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom
Solution/Explanation
POWER FAILURES
Printer fails to turn on, the
display is not backlit.
1. Check that the printer AC power cord is correctly attached
to the printer and to the AC power outlet.
2. Have a qualified electrician test the AC wall outlet for the
correct power range. Locate the printer in an area that has
the correct power range.
3. Check the AC power cord. Replace a damaged AC power
cord or one that you suspect may be bad.
4. Call your authorized service representative.
PRINT QUALITY
•
Label(s) did not get
printed within a multi label
print job.
1. If the serial interface is being used, verify that the correct
data protocol is selected to match the host interface
protocol. Print data may have been lost.
•
A portion of the printed
image was clipped off
and the beginning of the
next label was printed on
the same physical label.
2. If Clip Page = Enable in the MEDIA SETUP menu, the
printer may have falsely detected a gap, hole, or black
mark and then clipped (discarded) the remaining printable
data for the label. To fix this:
a. Perform Auto Calibrate. See “Running Auto Calibrate”
on page 47.
b. Decrease Gap Threshold value by 2 or 3 increments.
See “Gap/Mark Thresh” on page 85.
c.
Media moves, but no image
prints in ONLINE mode.
Set Clip Page to Disable. Set Label Length to correct
physical length value. See “Clip Page” on page 79.
1. Make sure the power supply cable has a good connection
to the right side of the printhead.
2. Place the printer offline and print the Checkerboard
diagnostic test pattern (see page 139). If the pattern prints,
there is a communication problem between the host
computer and the printer.
Media moves, but no image
prints in Direct Thermal
mode.
176
1. Media is not the type for direct thermal printing. Install
direct thermal media.
2. Direct thermal media is installed wrong side up. Reinstall
the media with the correct side facing the printhead.
Solving Other Printer Problems
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom
Media and ribbon move, but
no image prints in Thermal
Transfer mode.
Solution/Explanation
1. Print the Checkerboard diagnostic test pattern and check
that the image appears on the used portion of ribbon. If the
image is on the ribbon, the ribbon may be installed with the
transfer side against the printhead, instead of against the
media.
2. The ribbon may be designed for another model printer.
3. The ribbon may not be compatible with the media.
When narrow media is
installed, the media moves
but no image prints.
Verify the Label Width value in the MEDIA SETUP menu
agrees with the width of the installed media. Too large a value
will start the image too far to the right and off the media.
Printing is faded or of poor
quality.
1. Clean the printhead.
2. Close the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully
clockwise.
3. Verify that the printhead balance adjustment dial is
properly set. See “Printhead Pressure Adjustment” on
page 41.
4. Verify that the Print Speed and Intensity values are
correct. Adjust Print Speed in the MEDIA SETUP menu or
via host software. Adjust Print Intensity in the MEDIA
SETUP menu or via host software.
5. Verify that the printhead alignment is optimized.
See “Printhead Alignment” on page 43.
Prints strange characters
instead of the correct label
format.
1. If the printer serial interface is being used, check that the
printer serial baud rate setting matches the baud rate of
the host computer. Reset the printer via software, or turn
the printer off and then on.
2. Check if the printer serial host interface is set for 8 data
bits but the transmitting device is set for 7 data bits (or
vice-versa). Check the current setting by viewing it on the
LCD, and use the INTERFACES menu to adjust the
settings, if necessary.
3. If the printer parallel interface is being used, make sure the
parallel interface terminating resistors are correct for the
host computer drivers.
177
Chapter
6
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom
•
Start of image is printed
an erroneous distance
from the top-of-form.
•
The printer starts to print
one label and then
another, all within the
same physical label.
Solution/Explanation
1. Make sure the Label Length value matches the actual
physical length of the label installed and run Auto-Cal
(see page 47).
These symptoms could be caused by:
•
•
severely curled labels near the end of a media roll
•
multiple gaps within the physical label.
the media sensor triggering off of a dark, preprinted image
on the label
2. In the MEDIA SETUP menu, set Clip Page to Disable.
3. Run a Media Profile (see page 48).
4. If the Media Profile printout shows that preprinted images
or an RFID antenna tag has an amplitude approaching the
Gap/Mark Threshold level, position the media sensor to
avoid the image or increase the Threshold Range percent
value in the SENSOR SETUP menu. Run Auto-Cal again
and Media Profile to verify there is an improvement.
•
Loss of one or more
serialized labels within a
print job.
•
Start of image is printed
in the middle of the gap.
•
The top part of the image
is lost when printing with
Head First orientation
selected.
178
1. In the SENSOR SETUP menu, set Gap Windowing to
Enable.
2. Set Gap Length to equal the physical gap length of the
media installed. The range is 0.05 to 1.00 inches.
The likely cause of these symptoms is that Clip Page = Enable
and a cross-perforation, radical fold or flaw in the liner has
caused the media sensor to detect this as the leading edge
(TOF) of the new label or end of label (EOF), or both.
Solving Other Printer Problems
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom
Smears or voids in printed
image.
Solution/Explanation
1. Clean the printhead.
2. Make sure the printhead temperature (Print Intensity) is
not too high. Change the Print Intensity value in the
MEDIA SETUP menu. See “Print Intensity” on page 69.
3. Verify that the printhead pressure switch are positioned
correctly to match the media thickness installed.
4. Make sure the printhead balance adjustment dial is set
properly for the media width installed.
5. Make sure that the ribbon is routed correctly and not
routed through the media sensor assembly.
6. Skin oils can adhere to the surface of label stock, causing
fingerprints which inhibit thermal transfer. Wipe label stock
with a cloth, or remove a few feet of labels to expose a
clean area. Handle labels by the edges.
7. Check that the media has not been mishandled before or
during installation in the printer. Soiled media or media
with fingerprints will prevent proper ribbon transfer.
8. Check that media has not been installed inside out.
Surfaces on both sides may look identical but can produce
big differences in print quality.
9. Make sure the correct ribbon and media combination are
being used. Use the correct ribbon type.
10. Check the ribbon for creases or folds across its surface.
Smooth out the ribbon to remove any creases.
11. Reduce the Print Speed value through the MEDIA SETUP
menu or via host software.
12. If using ribbon (Transfer Print mode), do not use direct
thermal media.
179
Chapter
6
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom
Solution/Explanation
PRINTER OPERATION
Advances several labels
when Feed key is pressed.
1. Check that labels are loaded correctly. (See “Loading Roll
Media” on page 25.)
2. Check that the Label Length (in the MEDIA SETUP menu,
or sent by the host computer) agrees with the length of the
media installed. Although gaps, holes, notches, or black
marks are used to establish the Top-of-Form position, a
larger page length will override the gap and skip a page or
more if Clip Page (in the MEDIA SETUP menu) is set to
Disable. Set Page Length to match the media being used.
3. Check that the printer is optimized to detect the type of
media installed. Perform Auto Calibrate for gapped and
black mark media. (See “Running Auto Calibrate” on
page 47.)
4. Adjust the media sensor horizontally to detect gaps, holes,
notches, or narrow width black marks. (See “Positioning
The Media Sensors” on page 44.)
5. If the problem persists, run the Media Profile printout to
see if the label length indicators are being sensed.
6. Run Manual Calibrate. (See “Running Manual Calibrate”
on page 50.)
Print is too small or too large.
Ensure the proper printhead is installed (203 or 305 dpi).
•
Print quality is good, but
the printer skips every
other label.
•
An occasional blank label
occurs within a print job,
but no labels are lost.
1. Make sure that the label is not formatted too close to the
top edge of the form. Leave white space equal to eight dot
rows at the top of the label. 305 dpi = .0264 inches.
203 dpi = .04 inches.
180
2. Check that Clip Page = Enable in the MEDIA SETUP
menu. Clip Page = Enable causes any printable data to be
clipped off and lost once the next TOF position
(transmissive gap, notch, hole, or reflective mark) is
detected. Clip Page = Disable allows the printer to ignore a
gap or mark. The printer looks for the gap or mark after the
specified Label Length is first reached.
Printer Alarms
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom
Solution/Explanation
RIBBON
Printer cuts (melts) through
the transfer ribbon.
1. Verify that Print Intensity is set to the proper level in the
MEDIA SETUP menu.
2. Verify that Print Mode in the MEDIA SETUP menu is set
for Transfer and not Direct Thermal.
Printing stops and the FAULT
status indicator flashes.
1. Check that the media sensor is clean and undamaged.
2. Check that the gap between the bottom of a label and the
top of the next label is at least 0.100 inch. Use only labels
and tag stock approved for this printer.
3. Inspect for a jammed label. Remove the jammed label.
4. Check that the transfer ribbon and label stock are routed
correctly.
Printer Alarms
The printer has built-in alarms that monitor printer status and media stock
conditions. Alarm messages display indicating the present status of the
printer and media stock levels. The alarms also indicate if the printer
electronics detect an error condition.
Fault Messages
If a fault condition occurs in the printer, the FAULT indicator on the control
panel flashes on and off and the message display indicates the specific fault.
Fault messages are summarized in Table 15.
Displayed faults fall into one of two categories:
•
•
Operator correctable
Field service required
Operator-Correctable Fault Messages
For the operator-correctable faults, follow the suggested corrective action
under the solution section of the table. After correcting the displayed fault,
press the (Pause) key to clear the error message and status indicator and
resume printing. If the fault message reappears, power off the printer and wait
15 seconds before powering on the printer again. If the error condition
persists, contact your authorized service representative.
181
Chapter
6
Restore The Printer To Operation
Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention
If a fault is not correctable by the operator, the fault message is followed by an
asterisk (*). This usually indicates that an authorized service representative is
needed. You should try two steps to clear the fault before calling your
authorized service representative:
1. Set the printer power switch to O (off), wait 15 seconds, then turn the
printer on again. Run your print job again. If the message does not
appear, it was a false indication and no further attention is required.
2. If the message reappears, press the (Pause) key. If the message goes
away, it was a false indication and no further attention is required. If the
message reappears, call your authorized service representative.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
40V POWER FAIL
Yes
+40 VDC: an internal
power failure.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
B10 ERROR:
NO DRAM DETECTED
Cycle Power
Yes
The printer could not
find any DRAM.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
B11 ERROR:
RAM TEST FAILED
Cycle Power
Yes
The printer found a
defective memory
location.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
B12 ERROR:
PROGRAM MISSING
Repeat Download
Yes
The printer cannot find
the data controller
program or the
validation checksum is
corrupt.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
B22 ERROR:
DECOMPRESS SIZE
Repeat Download
Yes
Problem when
downloading.
Cycle power. If problem
persists repeat download.
182
Fault Messages
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
B23 ERROR:
DECOMPRESS CKSUM
Repeat Download
Yes
Problem when
downloading.
Cycle power. If problem
persists repeat download.
BAD VFU CHANNEL
Yes
The user tried to use an
undefined VFU
channel.
Use defined channels.
CALIBRATION FAIL
See User Manual
Yes
Calibration values
derirved from Manual
Calibrate were not
acceptable.
Perform a Run Manual Cal
(run manual calibrate) again.
CANNOT CALIBRATE
Disable Peel-Off
Yes
Run Auto-Calibrate was
attempted with Peel-Off
Media Handling
selected.
NOTE: You can
perform Auto Calibrate
in Peel-Off mode if Cal
in Peel Mode = Enable.
Be prepared to catch
labels during Run
Auto-Calibrate.
1. Select another Media
Handling option in the
MEDIA SETUP menu.
1. Cutter assembly is
not in the closed
position.
1. Place the cutter
assembly in the closed
position.
2. Cutter option was
not able to
complete a full cut
cycle due to a jam.
2. Clear obstruction from
the cutter assembly.
CUTTER FAULT
Jam or Cut Fail
Yes
3. Cutter PCBA
detected current
overload and
opened circuit
breaker on cutter
PCBA.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
BEYOND XXMB EMC
Repeat Download
No
Printer contains an
XX MB EMC and the
firmware attempted to
access the EMC
beyond its limit.
2. Enable Cal in Peel Mode
in the SENSOR SETUP
menu.
NOTE: Admin User must
= Enable in the
PRINTER SETUP menu.
3. Insure media thickness
is within specification.
Wait a few minutes for
the cutter circuit breaker
to automatically reset.
Press (PAUSE) to
clear the fault message
and resume printing.
Contact your authorized
service representative.
NOTE: XX represents
the number of
Megabytes.
183
Chapter
6
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
DOWNLOADER ERROR
EXTERNAL FLASH IS
FULL
Optimize Files
Yes
An attempt was made
to download to a Full
EMC.
Delete and optimize files.
EMC NOT FOUND
PWR OFF PRINTER
Insert Cartridge
Yes
An attempt was made
to download to a
non-existent EMC.
Insert cartridge.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
FLASH NOT ERASED
Repeat Download
Yes
The printer
encountered an error
trying to program flash
memory.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
FLASH WRITE #1
Repeat Download
No
A Flash Write to Main
Flash failed to
complete.
Try downloading again or
contact your authorized
service representative.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
FLASH WRITE #2
Repeat Download
No
A Flash Write to Main
Flash failed to
complete.
Try downloading again or
contact your authorized
service representative.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
FLASH WRITE #3
Repeat Download
No
A Flash Write to
Expanded Flash failed
to complete.
Try downloading again or
contact your authorized
service representative.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
FLASH WRITE #4
Repeat Download
No
A Flash Write failed to
Expanded complete.
Try downloading again or
contact your authorized
service representative.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
FLASH: W ADDR BAD
Repeat Download
No
An attempt was made
to write to FLASH
where no FLASH
exists.
Try downloading again or
contact your authorized
service representative.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
MAIN FLASH IS FULL
Optimize Files
Yes
An attempt was made
to download to a full
main Flash memory.
Delete and optimize files.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
NO EMC DETECTED
Repeat Download
No
The printer does not
contain an EMC and
the firmware attempted
to access the EMC.
Contact your authorized
service representative.
EMC NOT FOUND PWR
OFF PRINTER
Insert Cartridge
Yes
An attempt was made
to download a non
compatible program
file.
Try downloading again. If the
problem persists, contact
your authorized customer
service representative.
184
Fault Messages
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
ERROR: INSUFFICIENT
DRAM
Cycle Power
Can User
Correct?
Yes/No
Explanation
Solution
Not enough RAM
memory available for a
printer function.
1. Power off the printer for
15 seconds, then power
back on again.
2. If the message
reappears, increase the
Glob Mem Adjust size in
the PRINTER SETUP
menu and reboot the
printer.
3. If the message
reappears, replace the
controller PCBA. Write
down the message and
return it with the
defective board.
ERROR: INSUFFICIENT
FLASH
Cycle Power
Yes
The printer requires
more flash memory to
run the downloaded
program.
1. Power off the printer for
15 seconds, then power
back on. If the problem
persists, contact your
authorized customer
service representative.
2. Consider installing an
optional Expanded
Memory Cartridge
(EMC) that adds 32 MB
of Flash memory to the
printer.
ERROR: WRONG
CHECKSUM
Repeat Download
Yes
The printer received the
complete program but
the checksum did not
match. The data may
have been corrupted
during download.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
ERROR OCCURRED:
CLEARING QUEUES
Please Wait
Yes
An interim message
displays while the
printer discards host
data it cannot use
because a fault
condition exists. While
this message displays,
the asterisk (*) rotates.
Wait. When the asterisk (*)
stops rotating, a different
fault message will appear;
troubleshoot the final
message.
185
Chapter
6
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
FILE SYS WRITE
Check Flash
Yes/No
Problem writing to flash
memory.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
GAP NOT DETECTED
Check Sensor and
Calibrate
Yes
The printer is set for
Gap or Mark sensing,
but no gap or mark was
detected.
1. Check that the setting of
the Gap/Mark Sensor in
the SENSOR SETUP
menu matches the
installed media.
2. Check the position of the
media sensors. (See
“Positioning The Media
Sensors” on page 44.)
3. Clean the sensor
assembly and paper
path.
4. Run Auto-Cal to improve
the sensor’s ability to
detect the media in use.
5. Run the Media Profile
printout in the SENSOR
SETUP menu.
6. Run Manual Calibrate.
(See “Running Manual
Calibrate” on page 50.)
7. Manually change the
Gap/Mark Thresh and/or
Paper Out Thresh
values.
E00 EXE @ ADDR0
See User Manual
Yes
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
186
Fault Messages
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
E01A TYPE 0x40
See User Manual
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
Solution
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
E01B TYPE 0x60
See User Manual
Yes
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
E02 MACHINE CHK
See User Manual
Yes
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
187
Chapter
6
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
E03A DSI HASH L
See User Manual
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
Solution
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
E03B DSI HASH S
See User Manual
Yes
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
E03C DSI BAT PL
See User Manual
Yes
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
188
Fault Messages
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
E03D DSI BAT PS
See User Manual
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
Solution
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
E03E DSI CXIWX
See User Manual
Yes
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
E03F DSI CXOWX
See User Manual
Yes
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
189
Chapter
6
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
E03G DSI ECXIWX
See User Manual
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
Solution
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
E03H DSI ECXOWX
See User Manual
Yes
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
E04A ISI NO TRA
See User Manual
Yes
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
190
Fault Messages
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
E04B ISI DIRECT
See User Manual
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
Solution
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
E04C ISI PROTEC
See User Manual
Yes
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
E06 NOT ALIGNED
See User Manual
Yes
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
191
Chapter
6
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
E07 ILLEGAL INS
See User Manual
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
Solution
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
E08 FLOATINGPNT
See User Manual
Yes
An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
EC SOFTWARE FAIL
Cycle Power
Yes/No
Engine control software
failure.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
ENTER to Stop
Yes
Normal message when
a test print pattern that
will run continuously
has been enabled.
Press the ↵ (ENTER) key to
stop printing the test pattern.
ERROR: DC PROGRAM
NOT VALID
Yes/No
The printer cannot find
the data controller
program or the
validation checksum is
corrupt.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
192
Fault Messages
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
ERROR: FLASH
DID NOT PROGRAM
Yes/No
The printer
encountered an error
trying to program flash
memory.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
ERROR: PROGRAM
NEEDS MORE DRAM
Yes/No
The program exceeds
the memory limitations
of the printer.
Download a smaller
program.
ERROR: PROGRAM
NOT COMPATIBLE
Yes
The printer is not
compatible with the
downloaded program.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
ERROR: PROGRAM
NOT VALID
Yes
The printer does not
see a program in flash
memory.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
ERROR: SHORT AT
ADDRESS XXXX
Yes/No
Hardware failure in
DRAM or Main PCBA
controller circuitry.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
ERROR: WRITING
TO FLASH
Yes/No
Hardware or software
fault in flash memory.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
FILE EXISTS
Enable Overwrite
Yes
The printer operator
tried to save a file using
the name of an existing
stored file.
Install a larger flash memory
SIMM. For additional flash,
contact your authorized
service representative.
FILE SYS FULL
File Too Big
Yes/No
Insufficient flash
memory available to
store file.
Install a larger flash memory
SIMM. For additional flash,
contact your authorized
service representative.
193
Chapter
6
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
FILE SYS FULL
Delete Files
Yes
Insufficient flash
memory available to
store file.
Enter the PRINTER SETUP
menu. Select the Delete
Files option in the Main FFS
submenu to delete unwanted
files.
FILE SYS FULL
Optimize & Reboot
Yes
Insufficient flash
memory available to
store file.
Enter the PRINTER SETUP
menu and use the Optimize
& Reboot feature.
Half Speed Mode
Yes
The printhead is
approaching a hot
state. Half Speed Mode
helps the cooling
process and should
permit completion of
print jobs.
1. Allow printer to continue
printing. Full speed will
resume automatically
when a lower printhead
temperature is achieved.
Half Speed Mode helps
prevent a PRINT HEAD
HOT fault, which will
stop the printer.
2. Let the printer cool
down. Full speed will be
restored when printing is
resumed.
3. Lower Print Intensity and
Print Speed to reduce
frequency of Half Speed
Mode.
PGL ERROR
Yes
Appears when the
"Fault" option is
selected from Error
Report in the front
panel.
Deselect "Fault" from Error
Report on the front control
panel.
INVALID FILE SYS
Optimize&Reboot
Yes
File system not
detected or flash was
corrupted.
Enter the PRINTER SETUP
menu and use the Optimize
& Reboot option.
194
Fault Messages
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
LABEL MISSING
Check Media Path
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
The Label Taken
Sensor did not detect
the label present over
the tear bar with
Peel-Off Media
Handling mode
enabled.
•
LABEL READY
Remove Label
Yes
The label was
removed before the
printer stopped
printing or before
the LCD “Remove
Label” message
displayed.
•
The label slipped
behind the platen
roller.
•
The label wrapped
around the platen
roller.
•
Peel-Off Media
Handling mode was
mistakenly
selected.
•
A label was
detected at the
front of the printer
by the Label Taken
Sensor. This is the
normal reminder
message when
Peel-Off Media
Handling has been
selected.
•
•
A label was
removed, but the
“Remove Label”
message remained.
The incorrect
Media Handling
mode was
selected.
Solution
1. Press the Pause key to
continue printing and
then wait for the LCD
“Remove Label”
message before
removing the label.
2. Open the pivoting deck,
reinstall the label, close
the printhead, press the
Pause key, and continue
printing.
3. Open the pivoting deck
and remove wrapped
labels from the platen.
Clean all adhesive from
the platen. Reinstall
labels, close the deck,
press the Pause key,
and continue printing.
4. Select the correct Media
Handling mode in the
MEDIA SETUP menu.
1. Remove the label from
the front of the printer to
allow the next label to
print.
2. Verify that a front door
assembly is installed on
the printer and that it is
properly closed. Ensure
that no debris is
obstructing the door
mirror or the Label
Taken Sensor.
3. In the MEDIA SETUP
menu, change Media
Handling to the correct
selection.
195
Chapter
6
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
LOADING PROGRAM
FROM PORT XX%
Yes
The new emulation
program is loading into
printer RAM. XX%
indicates how much of
the program has
loaded.
No action required.
LOADING PROGRAM
INTO FLASH
Yes
A program is getting
loaded into flash.
No action required.
MEMORY REMOVED
Check EMC
Yes
The EMC was removed
while the printer was
powered on.
1. Power off the printer.
2. Install the EMC.
3. Power on the printer.
MENU MODE
MEDIA SETUP
Yes
Normal message that
displays when you first
press the MENU key to
place the printer in
Menu mode when no
validator option is
installed.
No action required.
MEDIA OUT
Load Media
Yes
The printer does not
sense media:
1. Install media. If a break
occurred, reinstall the
media. Press the Pause
key to clear the fault
message. Check the
media installation
procedures on page 25.
196
•
Media was not
installed or has run
out.
•
A break in media
has occurred.
•
Media was not
routed or installed
correctly.
•
The media sensor
is not positioned
correctly.
•
Media is installed
correctly, but the
sensor is not
detecting it.
•
Gap/Mark Thresh
value may be set
too high and/or
Paper Out Thresh
may be set too low.
2. Verify the media sensor
is properly positioned.
Run Auto-Cal to improve
the ability of the sensor
to detect the installed
media.
3. Check if the Gap/Mark
Thresh is too high or the
Paper Out Thresh is too
low. Lower the Gap/
Mark Thresh or raise the
Paper Out Thresh value.
4. If using media with no
gaps or black marks,
perform Run Auto-Cal to
establish a valid Paper
Out Thresh.
Fault Messages
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
MISSING PRINT
HEAD See Manual
Yes
NON VOLATILE
MEMORY FAILED
Yes/No
OPTION NOT
INSTALLED
Yes
Explanation
Solution
The printer does not
detect installation of the
printhead.
1. Install the printhead.
The printer assigns a
certain amount of
simulated NVRAM for
storage of saved
configurations. Large
emulations reduce the
amount of space
available for saving
configurations, which
means that sometimes
fewer than eight
configurations can be
saved. If this message
appears when saving a
configuration, it means
the printer is out of
memory. Previously
saved configurations
will still be available, but
the one that was
“saved” when the
message appeared is
not in memory. If this
message appears at
power-up, it means the
flash memory is
defective.
1. If the message appears
at power-up, call your
authorized customer
service representative.
1. Selection of
Peel-Off, Cut, or
Rewind Media
Handling was
attempted when the
option was not
properly installed.
1. Check that the correct
selection was attempted
and that the option is
installed.
2. The printer is
powered on with
the cutter not
connected
correctly.
2. Install or reset the
printhead signal cable
and printer cable.
2. If the message appears
while saving a
configuration, the printer
is out of memory and will
not save that or
subsequent
configurations.
(Previously saved
configurations are still
okay.)
3. Limit the number of
saved configurations to
seven.
2. Check that the
appropriate option is
installed and connected
correctly before
powering on the printer.
3. If the error persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
197
Chapter
6
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
PRINT HEAD UP
Close Print Head
Yes
Printhead is not closed.
Close the printhead pivoting
deck.
PRINTHEAD HOT
Wait 5 Minutes
Go Online
Yes/No
The printhead has
become overheated.
1. Allow the printhead to
cool down for 5 minutes,
then press Pause.
Resume printing.
2. If possible, reduce print
intensity.
3. If problem persists,
contact your authorized
service representative.
PRINTER UNDER
REMOTE CONTROL
Yes
Indicates that remote
management software
has control of the
printer.
Press any key on the printer.
PROGRAM IS NOT
COMPATIBLE WITH
THIS PRINTER
Repeat Download
No
An attempt was made
to download a
non-compatible
program file.
Try downloading again. If
problem persists, contact
your authorized service
representative.
REWINDER FULL
Remove Roll
Yes
The Rewinder Full
Sensor has detected a
roll full condition.
Remove the roll from the
rewind spindle.
RFID CNTRY BAD:
Set Country Freq
No
The RFID country
frequency has not been
set.
Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
RFID FW ERR
Version Mismatch
Yes
The printer firmware
version does not match
the installed RFID
encoder.
Complete the downloading
software procedure. See
“Downloading Firmware” on
page 149.
RFID TAG FAILURE
Check Media
Yes
Failed tag. Error
displays in STOP
mode, causing the
printer to halt.
Initiate reprint of the label
from the host. When the
error is cleared, the label
with the failed tag moves
forward to the next TOF
position.
198
Fault Messages
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
RFID TAG MAX
RETRY
Check Media
Yes
Failed tag. Error
displays in
OVERSTRIKE mode.
Each failed label prints
with the OVERSTRIKE
pattern; the form retries
until the label retry
count is exhausted.
Clear the error. When the
error is cleared, the label
with the failed tag moves
forward such that the next
label is in position.
Ribbon Low
Yes
1. The supply spool is
getting low.
1. Replace ribbon.
2. If there is a large
amount of ribbon
still on the supply
spool, then the
Ribbon Low
message is being
displayed falsely.
RIBBON OUT
Load Ribbon
Yes
1. The ribbon supply
spool is empty.
2. Disable Ribbon Low in
the MEDIA SETUP
menu.
1. Replace the ribbon.
2. Reinstall the ribbon.
2. The ribbon has
broken.
SECURITY CODE
VIOLATION
Yes
The software being
used is not correct for
the printer.
1. Load the correct
software.
2. Power off the printer for
15 seconds, then power
back on again. If the
problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
199
Chapter
6
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
SERIAL BUFFER
OVERFLOW
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
Host sent data after the
printer buffer was full
(Serial Interface).
Solution
1. Make a configuration
printout.
2. Verify that the printer
matches the host serial
interface configuration
settings for Data
Protocol, Baud Rate,
Data Bits, Stop Bits,
Parity, Data Terminal
Ready, and Request to
Send.
3. Set printer serial
interface parameters to
match those of the host.
SERIAL BUFFER
OVERRUN
Yes
Receive overrun (Serial
Interface).
1. Make a configuration
printout.
2. Verify that the printer
matches the host serial
interface configuration
settings for Data
Protocol, Baud Rate,
Data Bits, Stop Bits,
Parity, Data Terminal
Ready, and Request to
Send.
3. Set the printer serial
interface parameter to
match those of the host.
SERIAL FRAMING
ERROR
Yes
Serial framing error
over a serial interface.
Match the serial interface
settings of the printer to
those of the host computer.
SERIAL PARITY ERROR
Yes
Parity error (serial
interface).
Check your serial host
interface parameter settings.
If necessary, change them
so they match the settings of
the attached host.
SOFTWARE ERROR
Cycle Power
Yes/No
1. Application
software tried to
perform an illegal
power function.
1. Recycle the printer
power. If possible, print a
job that has previously
worked.
2. There are damaged
logic circuits on the
controller PCBA.
2. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
service representative.
200
Fault Messages
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message
WAITING FOR
PROGRAM
DOWNLOAD
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
Solution
Normal message when
the printer is powered
up while holding down
both the ↵ (Enter) and
1. Complete the
downloading software
procedure. See
“Downloading Firmware”
on page 149.
(Cancel) keys in
preparation to
download software to
the printer.
WIRELESS ADAPTER
NOT COMPATIBLE
Yes
The type of wireless
card is incompatible
with the printer
software.
2. Exit this procedure by
cycling printer power.
The PCMCIA radio card that
you installed may be
incompatible with the dual
NIC interface in the printer.
Verify the approved brand
and model number of the
radio card with your printer
service provider and install
the correct version. If using
the correct radio card does
not resolve this problem, call
your service provider for
further support.
201
Chapter
6
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 16. Status Messages
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
203 DPI Head
Installed
N/A
Normal power-up
message. The printer is
running its initialization
routine and indicating
DPI resolution of the
installed printhead.
No action required.
305 DPI Head
Installed
N/A
Normal power-up
message. The printer is
running its initialization
routine and indicating
DPI resolution of the
installed printhead.
No action required.
B20:FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD
N/A
Forced download mode
only.
No action is required.
CLEARING PROGRAM
FROM FLASH
N/A
Emulation software
successfully loaded into
printer RAM and the
checksum matched.
The old program is now
being deleted from
flash memory.
No action required.
D50 STATUS:
CLEARING FLASH
Please Wait
N/A
Emulation software
successfully loaded into
printer RAM and the
checksum matched.
The old program is now
being deleted from
flash memory. Forced
download mode only.
No action required.
D51: PROGRAMMING FLASH
LOADING PROGRAM
INTO FLASH
Please Wait
N/A
A program is getting
loaded into flash.
No action is required.
DO NOT POWER OFF
N/A
This is a standard
warning message that
displays while the
printer is downloading
software.
Do not power off the
printer until
downloading is
complete.
ETHERNET
INITIALIZING
Please Wait
N/A
Ethernet is initializing.
No action is required.
202
Status
Fault Messages
Messages
Table 16. Status Messages
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
ETHERNET READY
N/A
Ethernet Interface has
finished initializing.
No action is required.
ETHERNET
RESETTING
Please Wait
N/A
Ethernet Interface is
being reset.
No action is required.
LOADING PROGRAM
INTO FLASH
Please Wait
N/A
Expanded Flash
Cartridge download
mode only.
No action is required.
POWER SAVER MODE
N/A
This is a status
message. The printer is
in low-energy idle state,
the higher voltages are
off, the front panel is
dimmed, and only
+5Vdc logic circuits are
active.
No action required.
Sending a print job or
pressing any control
panel key turns off
power saver mode.
PRINTER RESETTING
Please Wait
N/A
Printer finished loading
the program into flash
memory and is
automatically resetting
itself.
No action is required.
RESTORING
BOOT CODE
Yes
Normal download
initialization message.
No action required.
SDRAM TEST 32MB
N/A
Status only not an error.
No action is required.
STATUS:
LOADING FIRMWARE
Please Wait
N/A
Normal message when
the printer is powered
up while holding down
Complete the
downloading
software procedure.
both the
(Menu) and
the Down keys in
preparation to
download software to
the printer.
TESTING HARDWARE
PLEASE WAIT
Yes
Normal power-up
message. Printer is
running its initialization
routine.
No action required.
203
Chapter
6
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 16. Status Messages
Displayed Message
THE ↵ KEY IS
LOCKED
THE ↵ KEY IS
UNLOCKED
To Stop Press ↵
204
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Yes
N/A
Explanation
Solution
A momentary status
message that appears
when an attempt is
made to change a
menu option or perform
a diagnostic print test.
By default, the
↵ (Enter) key is locked
when the printer
powers on.
1. Unlock the Enter
key by pressing
DOWN + ↵ at the
same time. (This
is the factory
default key
combination.)
A momentary status
message that appears
when the ↵ (Enter) key
is unlocked, permitting
configuration
parameters to be
changed.
1. No action is
necessary if you
want the ↵ key
unlocked.
Normal message when
a test print pattern that
will run continuously is
printing.
Press the ↵ (Enter)
key to stop printing
the test pattern.
2. A different unlock
key combination
will be in affect if
the Set Lock Key
option in the
Printer Setup
menu was used.
2. Press the DOWN
+ ↵ keyat the
same time if you
want to lock the ↵
key.
A
Specifications
Print Method
SL4M/T4M
SL4M/T4M
Print Resolution (dpi)
203
305
Method
Direct or Thermal
Transfer
Direct or Thermal
Transfer
Max. Print Speed (ips)
10
10
Max. Slew Speed (ips)
10
10
Max. Print Width (in.)
4.1 (104.1 mm)
4.1 (104.1 mm)
Flash Memory (MB) Standard
8
8
Flash Memory (MB) Maximum with Expanded Memory
Cartridge (EMC) option
40
40
DRAM (MB) Standard/Max (fixed)
32
32
Max. Print Length (in.) at max. width, std. MB DRAM
99 (2515 mm)
99 (2515 mm)
205
Appendix A
Media
Table 17. Media - General Information
Type
Roll-fed, die-cut continuous or fanfold labels, tags or tickets;
most direct thermal or thermal transfer materials.
Supply Roll
8.0 inch (203.2 mm) maximum outside diameter on a
3 inch (76.2 mm) diameter core.
Rewinder
Accepts a full roll of backing from an 8 inch diameter roll of
labels.
Label Material
Thermal transfer plain-coated papers, vinyl, Mylar, metallized
paper, non-woven fabric, fine woven fabric, thermal-visible light
scannable paper, infrared scannable paper, thermal ticket/tag
stock, thermally-sensitive plastic stock.
Media Sensing
Horizontally moveable sensor assembly. When set to Gap, the
assembly detects die-cut labels on liner media and notches and
holes in tag stock. When set to Mark, it senses a black mark on
the underside of tag or label stock. When set to Disable, it
senses no label indicators or ignores all existing label length
indicators on the installed media. Also detects paper out.
Label Taken Sensor
Detects when a printed label is at the printer exit throat. Used
only for Peel-Off Media Handling mode.
Label Peel-Off
Peels and presents label to the operator, one at a time.
Label Peel-Off is supported only when using the Standard Peel
option or Peel-Liner Rewinder option.
Standard Peel
Peels labels while discarding the dispensed liner in front of the
printer. Optional installation.
206
Media
I. Tag Specification
(Mark Sensing)
II. Tag Specification
(Gap Sensing)
III. Label Specification
(Gap Sensing)
Black Mark (on underside)
Recommended
Cross Perf
Location
Recommended
Cross Perf
Location
G
Direction of Media Motion
Direction of Media Motion
Direction of Media Motion
Figure 5. Media Dimensions
Table 18. Media Specifications
SL4M/T4M
A
Label Width Range
0.87 to 5.0 inches
22 to 128 mm
B
Liner Width Range
1.0 to 5.15 inches
25 to 128 mm
C
Min. Gap/Hole/Notch Height
0.10 in.
2.54 mm
D
Media Length Range
Tear-Off Strip Mode
0.25 in. (6 mm) to 99 in. (2515 mm)
Peel-Off Mode
1 in. (25.4 mm) to 39 in. (991 mm)
Cut Mode
1 in. (25.4 mm) to 99 in. (2515 mm)
Rewind Mode
0.5 in. (13 mm) to 99 in. (2515 mm)
Continuous Mode
0.25 in. (6 mm) to 99 in. (2515 mm)
E
Media Thickness Range
0.0023 to 0.010 in.
0.06 to 0.254 mm
G
Width of Inter-label notch/hole
0.25* to 0.50 in.
6.35 to 12.7 mm
I
Min Refl. Mark Width
0.5 in.
12.7 mm
K
Min. Refl. Mark Height
0.10 in.
2.54 mm
These figures are approximate and depend upon the active emulation and application.
* You may need to select Mark sensing instead of Gap sensing for notch widths .25 in. or less due to
limited inside travel of the Gap sensor.
207
Appendix A
Media Thickness
The printer supports media thickness ranging from .002 to 0.010 inches
(0.051 to 0.254 mm).
Media Capacity
Media Type
Roll Supply
8.0 inches (maximum outside diameter) on 3 inch inside
diameter core
203 mm on 76.2 mm core
Fanfold Supply
7.87 inches (200 mm) maximum height at rear entrance.
Ribbon
Ribbon length
1476 feet (450 m)
Ribbon description
Coated side in (ink on the inside of the
ribbon) and coated side out (ink on the
outside of the ribbon).
Ribbon core
Internal diameter, 1.0 inch (25.4 mm)
Maximum outer diameter
3.3 inches (83.8 mm)
Maximum ribbon width
5.0 inches (127 mm)
Minimum ribbon width
1.55 inches (39.4 mm)
Ribbon width for optimum
performance
0.59 inches (15mm) wider than the media
Indicators And Switches
Table 19. Indicators and Switches
208
Indicator Lights:
Online, Fault
Switches:
Power
Keys:
Pause, Feed, ↑ (Up), ↓ (Down), ← (Left), → (Right),
↵ (Enter), ... (Menu), (Cancel),
Message Display:
One row of text and two rows of menu icons or
4 rows of 16 characters per row for error messages,
print status, and recalling stored formats. Eight rows
of 21 characters per row for changing menu
settings.
Memory
Memory
Flash Memory (standard)
8MB fixed on Controller PCBA
DRAM (standard)
32MB fixed on Controller PCBA
Optional Expanded Memory Cartridge
CAUTION
You must power off the printer before you install or remove the EMC, or
you may damage the EMC and the printer. If you remove the EMC after
powering on the printer with the EMC installed, the fault message
"MEMORY REMOVED Check EMC" will display. You cannot clear this
message by reinserting the EMC. You must cycle power.
The expanded memory cartridge (EMC) is a user installable 32MB memory
storage cartridge that provides additional flash memory for downloading
forms, logos, and fonts. The EMC can be ordered as a factory option kit or as
a field upgrade kit that allows users to increase the printer flash memory
capacity. The EMC can also come as a preloaded factory kit with one Asian
TrueType font (see “DBCS Character Sets and Fonts” on page 214).
Media Cutter Option
The media cutter is designed to cut tags and label liner. Avoid cutting through
the adhesive backed portion of any media.
Typical Life
More than 1,000,000 cuts
Warranty
500,000 cuts
Environment
Same specifications as printer
Cutting Method
Single-edged blade, up/down slice motion
Media Thickness Range
0.0025 to 0.010 in. (0.064 to 0.254 mm)
Media Width Range
1.00 to 5.15 inches (25.4 to 130.8 mm)
Media Length Range
1.00 to 99 in. (25.4 to 2515 mm)
209
Appendix A
Host Interfaces
1. Serial RS-232 at 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,
or 115200 baud.
2. Parallel (Centronics compatible) or IEEE 1284 bi-directional.
The RS-232 host interface shall have the following characteristics:
Character Set:
ANSI® ASCII character set
Word Length:
Selectable 7-bit or 8-bit data format
Handshaking:
XON/XOFF (in receive mode only) and
CTS/DTR
Input Buffer:
Selectable from 1k through 16 kbytes. XOFF is
transmitted and DTR goes low when buffer is
equal to or less than 25% of full. XON is
transmitted and DTR goes high when buffer is
25% above empty. Characters are transmitted
with no parity from the printer
Power
Table 20. Power Source and Grounding
Power Source
90 or 264 VAC 48/62 Hz auto-ranging power
supply.
Grounding
Unit must be connected to a properly
grounded receptacle.
Table 21. Power Consumption
Operating Mode
210
Watts
Power Saver
Less than 30 Watts
Idle
Less than 40 Watts
Maximum
150 Watts (@ 30% print density)
Environmental
Environmental
Operating Temperature:
32° F to 104° F (0° C to 40° C)
Storage Temperature:
-23° F to 104° F (-5° C to 60° C)
Operating Humidity:
Storage Humidity:
10% to 90%, non-condensing
5% to 90% non-condensing
Ventilation:
Free air movement
Dust:
Non-conducting, non-corrosive
NOTE: These conditions do not apply to media or ribbon storage.
Physical
Dimensions (Inches)
Weight
SL4M/T4M, unpacked
excluding options
12.13H x 11W x 18.75D
31.8 lbs. (14.5kg)
Standard Peel with Liner
Rewinder
18.62H x 11.0W x 18.75D
50.0 lbs. (22.7kg)
Full Media Rewinder
18.62H x 11.0W x 21.50 D
50.0 lbs. (22.7kg)
Standard Peel without Liner
Rewinder
12.12H x 11.0W x 18.75D
33.0 lbs. (15kg)
Cutter
12.13H x 11.0W x 18.75D
33.8 lbs. (15.4kg)
Acoustic Noise
Under typical operating conditions the noise level generated will not exceed
66 dBa regardless of printhead resolution, media, ribbon, or print speed. This
is in accordance with ISO 7779 and declared in accordance with ISO 9296.
211
Appendix A
212
B
Printer Options
Options are offered with the printer to enhance its capabilities and to provide a
large degree of application flexibility. A description of the option complement
is given below. Field-installable options include installation instructions.
Hardware Options
Media Cutter
The printer may be ordered with a cutter mechanism installed (for cutting tags
and label liner), or the option can be field installed by the user at a later date.
Once installed, the printer can be configured to automatically cut media after
each or a specified number of labels is printed.
NOTE: The Cutter option is not supported when the Full Media Rewinder or
either Standard Peel option is installed.
Full Media Rewinder
In batch rewind mode, rewinds printed labels into a removable roll. The printer
can be ordered with a rewinder or it can be field installed at a later date by an
authorized service representative.
Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder
In label peel-off mode, peels off labels one at a time before printing the next
label and rewinds the liner into a discardable roll. The printer may be ordered
with this option installed or it can be field installed by an authorized service
representative at a later date.
Standard Peel
This option provides the ability to peel labels while discarding the dispensed
liner in front of the printer. This option may be field installed by an the user at
a later date.
Expanded Memory Cartridge (EMC)
The EMC can be ordered as a factory option kit or as an upgrade kit that
allows users to increase the printer flash memory capacity by 32MB to store
fonts, custom forms, feature files, bitmaps, etc.
The EMC can also come as a preloaded factory kit with one Asian character
set and font (see “DBCS Character Sets and Fonts” on page 214).
For instructions on how to install the EMC, see page 215.
213
Appendix B
Interface Options
Real Time Clock
A clock chip with internal battery that keeps track of the year, month, day,
hour, minute, and second values. It continues to operate when the printer is
off. The printer may be ordered with this option installed or it can be installed
at a later date by an authorized service representative.
RFID
The RFID encoder programs smart labels (tags with embedded inlays). The
printer may be ordered with RFID installed making it an SL4M/T4M printer or
it can be field installed by an authorized service representative.
Interface Options
Network Interface Card (NIC)
This option permits placing the printer on a LAN rather than attaching it
directly to a host system. The printer may be ordered with either NIC included
in the shipping carton or it can be field installed at a later date. Either NIC is
user installable at the rear panel of the printer. Two NICs are available:
•
Ethernet 10/100Base-T. The Ethernet 10/100Base-T NIC supports data
transfer rates of 100 Mbps.
•
Wireless 802.11b/g. The wireless NIC provides wireless 802.11b/g
connectivity without expensive cabling and reconfigurations required from
a wired network. The remote management software, a powerful printer
management tool, is standard with the wireless NIC.
The printer can support only one NIC option at a time.
Software Options
DBCS Character Sets and Fonts
Optional Asian Double Byte Character Set (DBCS) language cartridges can
be ordered. Each cartridge contains one Asian DBCS character set and font,
supporting Simplified Chinese, Korean, or Japanese, as well as user
addressable memory area to expand the printer flash memory capacity.
214
InstallingCard
The (NIC)
EMC
Network Interface
Installing The EMC
CAUTION
You must power off the printer before you install or remove the EMC, or
you may damage the EMC and the printer. If you remove the EMC after
powering on the printer with the EMC installed, the fault message
“MEMORY REMOVED Check EMC” will display. You cannot clear this
message by reinserting the EMC. You must cycle power.
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off) from the front of the printer.
2. Raise the media cover.
Media
Cover
A
See page 216.
Power
Switch
215
Appendix B
Installing The EMC
A
From page 215.
EMC
Arrow
EMC Slot
EMC Slot
Cover
Release
Tab
3. Press the release tab and remove the EMC slot cover.
4. Plug the EMC (with the arrow positioned as shown) into the EMC slot.
5. Install the EMC slot cover.
6. Lower the media cover.
7. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
8. Verify that the printer recognizes the EMC:
a. When ONLINE or OFFLINE displays on the printer’s LCD,
press
to enter Menu mode.
b. Press the Left key until
c.
Press ↵ to enter the
DIAGNOSTICS displays.
DIAGNOSTICS menu.
d. Press the Down key until EMC FLASH Installed displays. The amount
of memory displays in megabytes. If this does not appear, the EMC
has not been properly installed. Start over at step 1.
216
Using The Standard Peel
Without
Liner
Rewinder
Configure
The
Printer
Menu
Using The Standard Peel Without Liner Rewinder
Configure The Printer Menu
1. Set Media Handling to Peel-Off in the MEDIA SETUP menu.
See Chapter 4, “Configuring The Printer” on page 61 for more
information.
2. Calibrate the printer (see “Running Auto Calibrate” on page 47).
NOTE: Calibration in Peel-Off mode is allowed only if Cal in Peel Mode is set
to Enable. Cal in Peel Mode appears only if Admin User is set to
Enable in the PRINTER SETUP menu.
CAUTION
When the printer calibrates in peel-off mode, a series of labels will
quickly dispense. Be prepared to remove the peeled labels as they
automatically peel or the printer will jam.
Load Media
Media Cover
Pivoting
Deck
NOTE: Peel
shaded label
off liner.
Label
Deck Lock
Lever
Standard Peel
Door
Standard Peel
Opening
Media Damper
Media Width
Guide
Standard Peel Roller Peel Bar
Figure 6. Loading the Printer for Standard Peel Operation
217
Appendix B
Using The Standard Peel Without Liner Rewinder
1. To load media, refer to “Loading Roll Media” on page 25 and complete
steps 1 through 7.
2. Open the standard peel door by pulling it out and down.
3. Thread the media over the peel bar, behind the standard peel roller, and
through the standard peel opening (see Figure 6).
4. Horizontally center the standard peel roller over the label.
5. Peel the label (located over the tear bar) off the liner (refer to Figure 6).
This will prevent the labels from sticking to the tear bar during the initial
print feed.
Standard
Peel Door
Label
Deck Lock Lever
Liner
Figure 7. The Standard Peel Option
6. Rotate the deck lock lever clockwise to close the pivoting deck.
7. Close the standard peel door by pulling upward and it will lock in place.
8. Press the
(Feed) key to advance the media to the next
TOF (Top-of-Form) position. A label dispenses with the liner falling in
front of the printer.
9. Press the
(Pause) key until ONLINE displays.
10. Close the media cover.
218
Using The Full
Media The
Rewinder
Configure
PrinterOption
Menu
Using The Full Media Rewinder Option
The Full Media Rewinder allows you to automatically rewind printed labels
into a roll after they have been printed.
Configure The Printer Menu
1. Set Media Handling to Rewind in the MEDIA SETUP menu.
(See Chapter 4, “Configuring The Printer” for more information.)
2. Calibrate the printer (see “Running Auto Calibrate” on page 47).
Load Media
Media Cover
Rewinder
Media
Media
Rewinder Clip
Media Guide
Side Cover
Media Guide
Roller
Frame
Opening
Media Damper
Figure 8. Loading the Media Rewinder
1. To load media, refer to “Loading Roll Media” on page 25 and complete
steps 1 through 10. Be sure to open the side cover.
2. Thread the media over the front of the media guide, around the media
guide roller, and through the frame opening toward the rewinder.
See Figure 8 and Figure 9.
219
Appendix B
Using The Full Media Rewinder Option
NOTE: The alternate ribbon path is for inside ink ribbon.
The alternate media path is for inside wound label path.
Alternate
Ribbon Path
Media
Media
Guide
Media Guide
Roller
Alternate
Media Path
Front Door
Opening
Thumbscrew
Alternate Rewind Path
Thumbscrew
Rewinder
NOTE: The wind direction lever
(not shown) is located behind
the thumbscrew.
Rewinder Full
Sensor
Figure 9. Ribbon Rewind Path
3. Loosen the thumbscrew, pull it outward, position the wind direction lever
in the desired location, and tighten the thumbscrew. See Figure 9.
NOTE: Wind direction lever in lower position = clockwise rotation.
Wind direction lever in upper position = counterclockwise rotation.
IMPORTANT
If you do not complete the following step, it will be extremely difficult to
remove the printed labels from the rewinder.
4. Remove the media rewinder clip.
5. Wrap the leading edge of the media around the rewinder.
6. Slide the media flush against the left edge of the rewinder.
220
Using The Rewinder
Full MediaFull
Rewinder
SensorOption
Setup
Rewinder
Media Rewinder
Clip
Media
Figure 10. Securing Media on the Rewinder
7. Insert the media rewinder clip to secure the media. See Figure 10.
8. Manually rotate the rewinder one full revolution until the media is taut.
9. Rotate the deck lock lever clockwise to close the pivoting deck.
10. Press the
(Feed) key to advance the media to the next
TOF (Top-of-Form) position.
11. Press the
(Pause) key until ONLINE displays.
12. Close the side cover and media cover.
IMPORTANT
The rewinder supports a maximum diameter of 8 inches of printed
labels. Exceeding this diameter can cause printed labels to rub on the
bottom pan.
Rewinder Full Sensor Setup
1. Open the side cover and media cover.
2. Position the rewinder full sensor in the lower position and tighten the
thumbscrew. See Figure 9.
NOTE: When the rewinder full sensor detects a roll full condition, the
rewinder beeps and the message “REWINDER FULL Remove Roll”
displays.
3. Close the side cover and media cover.
221
Appendix B
Using The Standard Peel With Liner Rewinder Option
Remove Printed Media from the Rewinder
1. Open the media cover and side cover.
2. Press the
(Feed) key to advance the last printed label past the
printhead, and tear the liner from behind the last printed label.
3. Manually rewind the remaining printed labels onto the rewinder by turning
the rewinder.
4. Pull the media rewinder clip (along with the printed labels) off the
rewinder.
5. Remove the printed labels from the media rewinder clip. Set the printed
labels aside.
6. Insert the media rewinder clip into the rewinder.
7. Close the side cover and media cover.
Using The Standard Peel With Liner Rewinder Option
The Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder allows you to automatically peel
die-cut labels off their liner (backing) and dispense them one at a time while
rewinding the liner.
Configure The Printer Menu
1. Set Media Handling to Peel-Off under the MEDIA SETUP menu.
(See “Configuring The Printer” on page 61 for more information.)
2. Calibrate the printer (see “Running Auto Calibrate” on page 47).
222
Using The Standard Peel With Liner Rewinder
LoadOption
Media
Load Media
Media Cover
Deck Lock Lever
Rewinder
Media
Rewinder Clip
Pivoting Deck
Label
Knurled Roller
Peel-Off
Door
Platen
Rubber
Roller
Side Cover
Media Damper
Figure 11. Loading Media on the Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder
1. Open the media cover.
2. Open the side cover and refer to the Label and Ribbon Routes label on
the inside of the side cover.
3. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully
counterclockwise.
4. Open the peel-off door by pulling it upward, then forward.
5. Remove approximately 18 to 24 inches of labels from the liner. This will
prevent the labels from sticking to the tear bar during the initial print feed.
223
Appendix B
Using The Standard Peel With Liner Rewinder Option
6. Thread the media under the media damper, over the platen, and in
between the knurled roller and the rubber roller. See Figure 11 and
Figure 12.
7. Thread the liner under the rubber roller.
8. Remove the media rewinder clip.
Media
Alternate
Ribbon Path
Label
Platen
Tear
Bar
Alternate
Media Path
Peel-Off Door
Knurled Roller
(open position)
Rubber Roller
Rewinder
Liner
Knurled Roller
(closed position)
Thumbscrew
Figure 12. Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder Media Path
9. Wrap the leading edge of the liner over and around the rewinder.
10. Slide the liner flush against the left edge of the rewinder.
224
Using The Standard Peel With Liner Rewinder
LoadOption
Media
Rewinder
Media Rewinder Clip
Liner
Figure 13. Securing Liner onto the Rewinder
11. Insert the media rewinder clip to secure the media. See Figure 13.
12. Manually rotate the rewinder one full revolution clockwise until the liner is
taut.
13. Remove labels from the liner so that behind the tear bar the liner is
without labels for approximately 1.5 inches.
14. Remove labels from the liner so that below the tear bar the liner is without
labels for approximately 2 inches.
15. Rotate the deck lock lever fully clockwise to close the pivoting deck and
printhead.
225
Appendix B
Using The Standard Peel With Liner Rewinder Option
Media Cover
Rewinder
Label
Media
Rewinder Clip
Peel-Off
Door
Side Cover
Tear Bar
Printhead
Deck Lock Lever
Liner
Figure 14. The Rewinder In Peel-Off Mode
16. Close the peel-off door and snap it down to lock it in place.
17. Press the
(Feed) key. The label advances to the peel-off position,
and “LABEL READY Remove Label” displays on the LCD. The liner
remains on the rewinder. See Figure 14.
18. Press the
(Pause) key until ONLINE displays.
19. Close the side cover and media cover.
226
Removing Label Liner from the Rewinder
IMPORTANT
The rewinder supports a maximum diameter of 8 inches of liner.
Exceeding this diameter can cause the liner to rub on the bottom pan.
Removing Label Liner from the Rewinder
1. Open the media cover and side cover.
2. Open the peel-off door by pulling it upward, then forward.
3. Tear the liner at the tear bar.
4. Manually turn the rewinder to rewind the remaining liner onto the
rewinder.
5. Pull the media rewinder clip (along with the liner) off the rewinder.
6. Remove the liner from the media rewinder clip and discard the liner.
7. Insert the media rewinder clip into the rewinder.
8. Close the side cover and media cover.
9. Close the peel-off door by pulling it towards the rewinder then snapping it
downward.
227
Appendix B
Supplies
Supplies
The best printing solution is achieved when the printer, ribbon, and media are
matched to the application requirements. The use of Genuine Printronix
Thermal Media and Ribbons will ensure optimum image quality, consistent
bar code performance, and extended life of the printhead.
Please refer to the Printronix Media Selection Guide for details concerning the
application suitability for all media and ribbon products. To obtain a copy of
this guide, or for any other questions concerning Genuine Printronix Thermal
Supplies, please call:
Americas:
(800) 733-1900
Fax: (714) 368-2354
Europe, Middle East,
Africa:
(33) 1-46-25-1900
Fax: (33) 1-46-25-1919
Asia:
(65) 548-4116
Fax: (65) 546-1588
Or visit our website at www.printronix.com.
Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons
The following is a list of Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer ribbons:
Printronix Wide Spectrum Wax Ribbon 8300
Provides superior print quality for coated and uncoated paper and tag stocks.
Printronix Wax Resin Blend Ribbon 8500
Provides excellent high speed print quality with premium durability
performance on a wide range of thermal transfer receptive papers and films.
Printronix Specialty Resin Ribbon 8600
A premium resin formula for excellent image and scuff resistance, while
achieving premium print quality on a wide range of synthetic films and coated
papers.
Printronix Harsh Environment Resin Ribbon 8700
Provides the highest heat, chemical, and abrasion resistance for use with
high-end synthetic facestocks. When used with the proper polyester media,
meets UL/CSA regulatory requirements.
228
Genuine Printronix Media
Genuine Printronix Media
Printronix provides a wide variety of sizes, colors, and shapes of labels and
tags readily available to meet all of your labelling needs. The Printronix
Expanded Die Library details hundreds of label sizes and configurations
which are quickly obtainable through the Printronix custom order system
without the typical added costs and delays associated with the creation and
tooling of a special die to match your requirements. To order supplies, see
“Supplies” on page 228.
Genuine Printronix Media
Media Type
Description
Typical Applications
Media 110
Thermal Transfer
Premium coated paper, permanent acrylic
adhesive
Compliance shipping, general warehouse, address,
AIAG, LOGMARS, product ID, hardware parts supply
Media 120R
Thermal Transfer
Premium coated paper, removable
adhesive
Temporary product ID, pricing, point of sale, shelf
marking labels which can be cleanly removed
Media 180T
Thermal Transfer
7.0 mil coated paper tagstock
Retail hangtag, warehouse bin and pouch inserts,
inventory control, work in process, general purpose tag
Media 210
Direct Thermal
Economy paper, permanent acrylic
adhesive
Short life deli, grocery, shipping, work in process
Media 220
Direct Thermal
Premium paper, permanent acrylic
adhesive
Compliance shipping, general warehouse, address,
AIAG, LOGMARS, product ID
Media 270
Direct Thermal
Infra-Red scannable, permanent acrylic
adhesive
Infra-red scannability for overnight shipping and
grocery environments
Media 280T
Direct Thermal
7 mil paper tagstock
Economical ticket and tag stock for general retail and
industrial use
Media 410
Direct Thermal
3.3 mil film, permanent acrylic adhesive
Excellent moisture resistance and tear strength for
applications such as baggage tags, etc.
Media 510
Thermal Transfer
4.0 mil white polyolefin, permanent acrylic
adhesive
Durable satin finish for chemical pails and drums and
general outdoor and industrial use
Media 520
Thermal Transfer
Smudge-proof white polyolefin, permanent
acrylic adhesive
Outdoor exposures especially chemical drums, etc.
provides a markable soundproof topcoat
Media 580T
Thermal Transfer
8.5 mil smudge-proof, poly tagstock
Outdoor nursery, lumberyard, and industrial
environment hangtag and insert tag
Media 700’s
Thermal Transfer
2.0 mil polyester labelstock, white, bright &
matte chrome
UL/CSA compliant nameplate labels, harsh
environment and laboratory labels
Besides the standard roll label configuration, Genuine Printronix labels are
also available in fanfold configurations.
229
Appendix B
Supplies
Ribbon And Media Usage
Type
Media (Stock)
Ribbon
Features
Typical Applications
Direct Thermal
Paper Label
Tag
Synthetic Label
Not Used
Low cost.
Ease of use.
Low environmental durability.
Limited label life.
Will fade and/or discolor when
exposed to heat, sunlight, or
chemicals.
Shipping.
Inventory tracking.
Thermal Transfer
Paper Label
Tag
Printronix
Wide Spectrum
Wax 8300
Lowest cost thermal transfer
combination.
Most commonly used.
Low environmental durability.
Low abrasion resistance.
Longer life than direct
thermal.
Shipping.
Inventory tracking.
Product labeling.
Compliance labeling.
Thermal Transfer
Paper Label
Tag
Synthetic Label
Printronix Wax
Resin Blend
8500
Mid-range wax resin
performance and
characteristics at economy
wax prices.
Darker, razor-sharp, smudgeproof images.
Same as economy
applications with
advantage of
supporting
Polypropylene,
Polyethylene,
Polyolefin, and Valeron
media.
Tyvek® and
Valeron®
Thermal Transfer
Paper Label
Tag
Synthetic Label
Printronix
Specialty Resin
8600
Better environmental
durability.
Better abrasion resistance
than wax.
More expensive than wax.
Good aesthetic appearance.
Retail applications
where labels are
handled.
Excellent for most
applications.
Compliance labeling.
Thermal Transfer
Synthetic Label
Printronix Harsh
Environment
Resin 8700
High environmental durability.
High physical durability.
Excellent aesthetic
appearance.
Most expensive label/tag
combination.
High temperature
environments.
Medical applications.
Outdoor environments.
Environments with
chemicals.
Compliance labeling.
230
C
Char
Dec
ASCII Control Codes
Hex
NUL
0
00
SOH
1
01
STX
2
EXT
Char
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
32
20
@
64
40
`
96
60
!
33
21
A
65
41
a
97
61
02
+
34
22
B
66
42
b
98
62
3
03
#
35
23
C
67
43
c
99
63
EOT
4
04
$
36
24
D
68
44
d
100
64
ENQ
5
05
%
37
25
E
69
45
e
101
65
ACK
6
06
&
38
26
F
70
46
f
102
66
BEL
7
07
+
39
27
G
71
47
g
103
67
BS
8
08
(
40
28
H
72
48
h
104
68
HT
9
09
)
41
29
I
73
49
i
105
69
LF
10
0A
*
42
2A
J
74
4A
j
106
6A
VT
11
0B
+
43
2B
K
75
4B
k
107
6B
FF
12
0C
,
44
2C
L
76
4C
l
108
6C
CR
13
0D
-
45
2D
M
77
4D
m
109
6D
SO
14
0E
.
46
2E
N
78
4E
n
110
6E
SI
15
0F
/
47
2F
O
79
4F
o
111
6F
DLE
16
10
0
48
30
P
80
50
p
112
70
DC1
17
11
1
49
31
Q
81
51
q
113
71
DC2
18
12
2
50
32
R
82
52
r
114
72
DC3
19
13
3
51
33
S
83
53
s
115
73
DC4
20
14
4
52
34
T
84
54
t
116
74
NAK
21
15
5
53
35
U
85
55
u
117
75
SYN
22
16
6
54
36
V
86
56
v
118
76
ETB
23
17
7
55
37
W
87
57
w
119
77
CAN
24
18
8
56
38
X
88
58
x
120
78
EM
25
19
9
57
39
Y
89
59
y
121
79
SUB
26
1A
:
58
3A
Z
90
5A
z
122
7A
ESC
27
1B
;
59
3B
[
91
5B
{
123
7B
FS
28
1C
<
60
3C
\
92
5C
|
124
7C
GS
29
1D
=
61
3D
]
93
5D
}
125
7D
231
Appendix C
Char
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
RS
30
1E
>
62
3E
^
94
5E
US
31
1F
?
63
3F
_
95
5F
Char
~
NOTE: For the hardware handshake XON/XOFF commands:
XON = Ctrl Q (DC1)
XOFF = Ctrl S (DC3)
232
Dec
Hex
126
7E
127
7F
D
General Information
Printronix Customer Support Center
IMPORTANT
Please have the following information available prior to calling the
Printronix Customer Support Center:
•
•
•
•
Model number
Serial number (located on the back of the printer)
Installed options (i.e., interface and host type if applicable to the problem)
Configuration printout:
See “Printing A Configuration” on page 146.
•
•
•
Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer?
Description of the problem (be specific)
Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem (faxing of these
samples may be required)
Americas
(714) 368-2686
Europe, Middle East, and Africa
(31) 24 6489 311
Asia Pacific
(65) 6548 4114
http://www.printronix.com/support.aspx
Printronix Supplies Department
Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies.
Americas
(800) 733-1900
Europe, Middle East, and Africa
(33) 1 46 25 1900
Asia Pacific
(65) 6548 4116
or (65) 6548 4182
http://www.printronix.com/supplies-parts.aspx
233
Appendix D
Training Available On Printronix Products
Corporate Offices
Printronix, Inc.
14600 Myford Road
P.O. Box 19559
Irvine, CA 92623-9559
Phone: (714) 368-2300
Fax: (714) 368-2600
Printronix, Inc.
Nederland BV
P.O. Box 163, Nieuweweg 283
NL-6600 Ad Wijchen
The Netherlands
Phone: (31) 24 6489489
Fax: (31) 24 6489499
Printronix Schweiz GmbH
42 Changi South Street 1
Changi South Industrial Estate
Singapore 486763
Phone: (65) 6542 0110
Fax: (65) 6546 1588
Visit the Printronix web site at www.printronix.com
Training Available On Printronix Products
Printronix offers Product Maintenance Training Classes designed to enhance
the knowledge of your service personnel. Led by Printronix’ staff of highly
trained, experienced instructors, these structured classes include:
•
•
•
•
Hands-on work with the product
Theory of operation
Diagnosis of equipment failures
Preventive and corrective maintenance requirements and procedures.
Customized classes designed to meet your specific needs are available upon
request. Call Customer Training at (714) 368-2332 or visit the Printronix
website at www.printronix.com.
234
Warranty
Information
Corporate
Offices
Warranty Information
PRINTER WARRANTY
Printronix® warrants to the purchaser that under normal use and service, this
printer (excluding the thermal printhead) purchased hereunder shall be free
from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 90 days onsite (parts
and labor) plus 1 year parts return to factory service.
Consumable items such as media and ribbons are not covered under this
warranty. This warranty does not cover equipment or parts that have been
misused, altered, or used for purposes other than those for which they were
manufactured. This warranty also does not cover loss, shipping damage,
damage resulting from accident or damages resulting from unauthorized
service.
THERMAL PRINTHEAD
Printronix warrants the printhead for a period of one hundred eighty (180)
days, or 1,000,000 linear inches for direct thermal use, or 2,000,000 linear
inches for thermal transfer use, whichever comes first. The warranty does not
cover printheads that have been misused, damaged due to improper
cleaning, or damaged due to use of improper ribbons or media.
SUPPLIES
For the nearest Printronix full-service distributor that carries Printronix
genuine supplies, please call (800) 733-1900 or fax (714) 368-2354. Supplies
design, specification, and selection are integral to the development of any
computer imaging system. Printronix's extensive manufacturing and research
capabilities, along with years of experience in the design of printers and their
applications, assures that you will receive the exact materials that you require
to maximize the performance of your Printronix printer. For more information,
call the Printronix Customer Solutions Center at (714) 368-2686 or access the
Printronix website at http://www.printronix.com.
ON-SITE MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Printronix offers on-site support services in the United States and Canada.
Please contact the Printronix Maintenance Contracts Group at 800-854-6463
for detailed service agreement information.
Lithium Battery
WARNING
If you have the optional real-time clock, then the controller board
contains a lithium battery sealed inside the real-time clock chip. Do not
disassemble the chip to replace the battery. Do not dispose of the chip
by incineration. Failure to comply may cause the battery to explode.
Contact your local waste agency for the correct disposal procedure.
235
Appendix D
Communication Notices
Printronix makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this
material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose. Printronix shall not be held responsible
for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any
damages, whether direct, indirect, incidental or consequential, in connection
with the furnishing, distribution, performance or use of this material. The
information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Communication Notices
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any change or modification to this product voids the user’s authority to
operate it per FCC Part 15 Subpart A Section 15.21 regulations.
RF Exposure
To comply with FCC and IC RF exposure requirements, the device is
approved for operation with a minimum separation distance of 20cm for all
persons.
Co-location
To comply with FCC part 15C and IC RSS 210 requirements, the device must
not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter or
antenna other than those allowed by IBM for this device.
236
Communication
Corporate Notices
Offices
This product contains an intentional radiator with the following parameters:
Operating Frequency: 902 to 928 MHz
Typical RF Power: 100 milliwatts
Maximum RF Power: 700 milliwatts
Printronix SL4M and T4M
Tested To Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 and
RSS 210.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003
du Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate with the antennas listed below, and
having a maximum gain of –12 dBi. Antennas not included in this list or having
a gain greater than –12 dBi dB are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms.
To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its
gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power
(e.i.r.p.) is not more than that permitted for successful communication.
CE Notice (European Union)
Marking by the CE symbol indicates compliance of this Printronix system to
the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive of the European Union.
Such marking is indicative that this Printronix system meets the following
technical standards:
•
EN 300 220-1 (2000), Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum
Matters; Short Range Devices; Radio equipment to be used in the
25 MHz to 1000 MHz frequency range with power levels ranging up to
500 mW.
•
EN 55022 — “Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference
Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment.”
•
EN 50024 1998+A1:2001 — “Electromagnetic compatibility—Generic
immunity standard Part 1: Residential, commercial, and light industry.”
•
EN 60950 — “Safety of Information Technology Equipment.”
237
Appendix D
Communication Notices
This printer is a Class B product for use in a typical Class B domestic
environment.
CE Symbol
Taiwan
RFID
Intended use: non-specific short range device operating in the band 869.4 to
869.95 MHz for Home and Office environment in E.E.A and Switzerland.
Wireless Ethernet
Intended use: Low Power 802.11b/g radio LAN product operating indoor in
2.4 GHz bands for Home and Office environment in E.E.A and Switzerland.
238
Software License
Agreement
Corporate
Offices
Software License Agreement
Your printer contains, among other software, Printronix operating software
including, but not limited to the Embedded Configurable Operating System
(the “eCos Software”) as embedded software. The terms of this Agreement
apply only to the eCos Software, and all other embedded software supplied
with the printer. You accept the terms of this Agreement by your initial use of
your printer.
1. Object Code License
Printronix grants you a nonexclusive license to use the Printronix Software,
the eCos Software and all other embedded software (collectively, the
“Embedded Software” or the “Software”) only in conjunction with the printer.
As the rightful possessor of the printer, you may make a reasonable number
of copies of the Software as necessary for backup, configuration, and
restoration of the printer. You must reproduce the copyright notice and any
other legend of ownership on each copy of the Software you make.
You may transfer possession of the Software and its media to another party
only with the transfer of the printer on which the Software is used. If you do
so, you must give the other party a copy of these terms and provide all user
documentation to that party. When you do so, you must destroy any copies of
Software not resident in the printer.
Your license for the Software terminates when you no longer rightfully
possess the printer. No other rights under this license are granted.
2. Source Code
A source code version of eCos Software is available under the terms of the
Red Hat eCos Public License v1.1 at www.printronix.com. Printronix grants
no rights whatsoever in the source code for the Printronix Software.
3. No Warranty
THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON
AN “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
WARRANTIES THAT THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS FREE OF
DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU.
SHOULD ANY OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN
ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT RED HAT, PRINTRONIX, ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER
OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE.
NO USE OF ANY OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS AUTHORIZED
HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
4. Conflicting Terms
You agree that this Agreement provides you no more rights with regards to
warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms with respect to Red Hat, Inc.,
Printronix Inc, or any contributor to the Embedded Software than that
provided by the Red Hat eCos Public License v.1.1 or any express warranty
that may be made by Printronix, Inc.
239
Appendix D
Software License Agreement
5. Limitation of Liability
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY,
WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT OR
OTHERWISE, SHALL RED HAT, PRINTRONIX, ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE EMBEDDED
SOFTWARE, OR ANY PART THEREOF, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF
SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF
ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR
MALFUNCTION. OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR
LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY
RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY’S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT
APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THAT EXCLUSION
AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. U.S. Government Users
The Embedded Software is a “commercial item,” as that term is defined in 48
C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct 1995), consisting of “commercial computer software” and
“commercial computer software documentation,” as such terms are used in
48 C.F.R 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48
C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End
Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein.
7. Miscellaneous
This Agreement represents the complete agreement concerning subject
matter hereof. If any provision of this Agreement is held to be unenforceable.
This Agreement shall be governed by California law provisions (except to the
extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-of-law
provisions.
240
Limited Software Corporate
Product Warranty
Offices
8. Red Hat Statement With Regards to eCos Software
Part of the software embedded in this product is eCos - Embedded
Configurable Operating System, a trademark of Red Hat. Portions created by
Red Hat are Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2000 Red Hat, Inc.
(http://www.redhat.com). All Rights Reserved.
THE SOFTWARE IN THIS PRODUCT WAS IN PART PROVIDED BY RED
HAT AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OR SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBLITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Limited Software Product Warranty
Printronix, Inc. warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software
will perform in accordance with specifications published by Printronix, Inc.
Printronix, Inc. does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors
and omissions.
Remedy
Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Printronix, Inc. in connection
with the Software is replacement of defective software with a copy of the
same version and revision level.
Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies
1. THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED.
Printronix, Inc. does not warrant that the functions contained in the
Software will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Software
will be uninterrupted or error free. Printronix, Inc. reserves the right to
make changes and/or improvements in the Software without notice at any
time.
241
Appendix D
Limited Software Product Warranty
2. IN NO EVENT WILL PRINTRONIX, INC. BE LIABLE FOR LOST
PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS PRODUCT, EVEN IF PRINTRONIX, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED
BY THE ABUSE OR MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, SO
THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
3. Printronix, Inc. will not be liable for any loss or damage caused by delay in
furnishing a Software Product or any other performance under this
Agreement.
4. Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our liability of any kind
(including liability for negligence except liability for personal injury caused
solely by our negligence) for the Software Product covered by this
Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance by us under or
related to this Agreement are limited to the remedies specified by this
Agreement.
5. California law governs this Agreement.
Termination of License Agreement
This License shall continue until terminated. This license may be terminated
by agreement between you and Printronix, Inc. or by Printronix, Inc. If you fail
to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not corrected
within thirty (30) days after notice. When this License is terminated, you shall
return to the place you obtained them, the printer and all copies of the
Software and documentation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights
Use, duplication or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as
set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at
FAR 242.227-7013, subdivision (b) (3) (ii) or subparagraph (c) (1) (ii), as
appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c) (2).
Acknowledgement of Terms and Conditions
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT,
UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND
CONDITIONS. NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT
OR REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT. NO
CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND
SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH
PARTY. BY USING THIS PRINTER, YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
242
E
Glossary
Baud (rate)
Baud Rate is the number of information bits that can
be transmitted between the printer and the computer
in one second. For example, one baud equals one bit
per second in a series of binary signals. Both the
printer and the computer must be configured to the
same baud rate.
BIT
Binary digIT. A digit in the binary number system,
represented by a 0 or a 1. A bit is the smallest unit of
storage in a digital computer.
Boot-up
The start-up procedure which causes a computer
operating system to be loaded into main memory.
Buffer
An area of storage into which data is read or written
temporarily during data transfers.
Configuration
Refers to the operating properties that define how the
printer responds to signals and commands received
from the host computer at the printer interface. These
properties are called configuration parameters and
are set to match the operating characteristics of the
host computer system.
Continuous Media
Media comprised of one continuous length without a
gap, notch, hole, or black mark to establish a
predetermined label or tag length. With this media
type, the Host Form Length or user-selected Label
Length sets the desired length of each label.
Continuous Media
Handling Mode
A media handling mode that advances media in the
forward direction only.
Controller
An independent functional logic unit in a data
processing system that controls data paths between
one or more units of peripheral equipment.
Data Bits
Binary information sent to the printer; a character set
grouping containing letters, digits, and punctuation
marks to be printed.
243
Appendix E
Default
A value, parameter, attribute, or option that is
assigned by a program or system when another has
not been specified by the user.
Diagnostic
Pertaining to the detection and isolation of a printer
malfunction or mistake.
Direct Thermal
Media
Direct Thermal
Printing
DRAM
Media coated with special chemicals that act as an
accelerator, acceptor dye, and binder. In Direct
Thermal mode, the heat from the selected
rectangular elements in the thermal printhead makes
direct contact with the media (no ribbon is used) and
causes a chemical reaction that creates the image on
the media.
A printing method in which no ribbon is used to
transfer data from the printhead to the media to
create an image. The thermal printhead selectively
heats small rectangular elements which make direct
contact with the coated media.
Dynamic Random Access Memory. Can be read
from or written to at any time. DRAM is volatile:
whatever is in DRAM is lost when power is turned off.
Expanded Memory Cartridge (EMC)
The expanded memory cartridge (EMC) is an extra
32MB Flash memory storage cartridge that allows
users to download forms, logos, and fonts.
244
Fanfold Media
Media supplied in a fanfold stack instead of a roll
format.
Flash Memory
Nonvolatile memory. See Nonvolatile Memory.
Font
A collection of printing characteristics for printing
alphanumeric characters, all of which combine to
produce a distinctive style of print.
Host Computer
The computer that stores, processes, and sends
data to be printed, which communicates directly with
the printer. The term “host” is used to indicate the
controlling computer, since modern printers are
themselves microprocessor-controlled computer
systems.
PGL
Intelligent Graphics Printing software for the
Printronix Graphics Language, designated for
Printronix printers. IGP/PGL provides online forms,
barcodes, and many alphanumeric text-generation
capabilities and is compatible with earlier versions of
Printronix IGP protocol and programming.
Interface
The hardware component used to link two devices by
common physical interconnection, signal, and
functional characteristics.
IPS
The speed at which the media is printed based on a
rate of Inches-Per-Second.
Label Liner (backing) The material labels are attached to during their
manufacturing process. Attachment is usually
accomplished with an adhesive. After printing, labels
can be easily removed from the liner and the liner
discarded or recycled.
Label Taken Sensor
A sensor located at the front of the printer to detect
the presence of a label extended out the front of the
printer. The sensor is used only during Peel-Off
Media Handling to sense a label and then detect its
removal prior to printing the next label.
Media
Material onto which data is printed by the printer. The
types of media supported by the printer are die-cut
labels or tag stock, supplied in roll or fanfold format.
Media is further described by the type of sensing
used to detect the Top-of-Form position based on the
label length indicators used. Transmissive (Gap)
media uses a liner gap, notch, or hole between
labels, and Reflective (Mark) media uses a horizontal
black mark located on the underside of the tag stock
or label liner. Continuous media (with no label length
indicators) uses no sensing method, and the
operator determines which label length is desired.
Media Sensor
The sensor used to detect the presence of media in
the paper path as well as the gap, notch, or hole
position of Transmissive media or the horizontal
black mark on Reflective media.
Memory
See RAM, Nonvolatile Memory, DRAM, and Flash
Memory.
Nonvolatile Memory
Nonvolatile memory stores variables that must be
preserved when the printer is turned off, such as
configuration parameters and printer usage statistics.
Nonvolatile memory is preserved because RAM is
housed on the controller board, which contains an
independent, battery-operated power supply. When
printer power is turned off, the battery supplies the
power needed to keep stored data active. Nonvolatile
memory also includes storage in disk.
NVRAM
Acronym of Nonvolatile Random-Access Memory.
See Nonvolatile Memory.
245
Appendix E
Parity (check)
Parity checking is the addition of a non-data bit to
data, resulting in the number of “1 bits” being either
always even or always odd. Parity is used to detect
transmission errors. Parity represents value in the
check digit of the received or transmitted data.
PCBA
Printed Circuit Board Assembly. A PCB with
components (ICs, resistors, capacitors, etc.)
installed.
Port
A data channel used for receiving data from or
transmitting data to one or more external devices.
Protocol
The rules and conventions that govern
communication between a printer and a host
computer. A protocol includes codes for printing text
and graphics and codes instructing the printer to
perform special operations.
RAM
Random-Access Memory. Also called “main
memory” or “working memory.” It is the active
memory of the printer into which programs are
loaded. RAM is saved to volatile memory because
data in RAM is lost when power is turned off or
interrupted.
Reflective Mark Sensing
Use of the media sensor to transmit and receive
infrared light off the underside of media to detect
horizontal black marks used for determining the Topof-Form position on labels or for indicating a Paper
Out condition.
Resolution
A measure expressing the number of component
units in a given range used to create an image; in
printing, expressed as the number of dots per inch
(dpi) horizontally and vertically.
RFID Encoder
The RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) encoder
programs smart labels (tags with embedded inlays).
Roll Media
Media supplied in a roll format, on a 3-inch cardboard
core.
Sensed Distance
Gap/Mark Sensor = Gap: The Sensed Distance
value is the physical length of one label plus the
length of one gap.
Gap/Mark Sensor = Mark: The Sensed Distance
value is the physical distance from the trailing edge
of one black mark to the trailing edge of the next.
Slew
246
Vertical paper movement.
Stop Bits
Thermal Transfer
Media
Thermal Transfer
Printing
Transmissive (Gap)
Sensing
The signal which indicates the end of a character or
element.
Media specifically designed to work with a ribbon for
image transfer. In Thermal Transfer mode,
compatibility between the ribbon and the media is
critical in producing a high quality, long lasting image.
A printing method in which the printhead presses a
specially coated ribbon against the media. The
printhead elements react with the ribbon and bond
the image to the media.
Use of the media sensor to transmit infrared light
through the media to detect gaps, holes, or notches
for determining the Top-of-Form position on labels or
for indicating a Paper Out condition.
247
Appendix E
248
Index
Numerics
B23 ERROR DECOMPRESS CKSUM, 183
BAD VFU CHANNEL, 183
1284 Parallel Interface, 56
Batch Counter option, 114
203 DPI, 202
Bold Chars. option, 113
300 DPI, 202
Boundary Check option, 103
40V POWER FAIL, 182
Byte Mode, IEEE 1284 interface, 56
A
C
Acoustic Noise, 211
C39 Compatbl. option, 102
Adjustments
Cable Length, Centronics parallel interface, 54
media width, 42
Cal in Peel Mode option, 88
Admin User Enable, 63
CALIBRATION FAIL, 183
Admin User option, 114
Cancel Key, 37
Adv Continuous option, 70
Cancel Key option, 108
AI 00 Spaces option, 100
CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel-Off, 183
Alarm option, 107
Centronics
Alarms, printer, 181
interface signals, 55
Auto Calibrate, run, 47
parallel interface, 54
Auto Label Width option, 77
pin assignments, 54
Auto Locking option, 110
Change Printer Settings, 64
Auto Map Select option, 75
Cleaning
Auto Save Configuration, 142
cutter option, 168
Auto Save Feature, 143
exterior, 165
Auto Save option, 137
general, 165
Auto Switching, 53
interior, 165
optional host interfaces, 53
media sensor, 166
standard host interfaces, 53
platen roller, 166
Auto Uppercase option, 97
Autowrap option, 97
printhead, 166
Clear Error Log option, 140
B
B10 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED, 182
B11 ERROR RAM TEST FAILED, 182
B12 ERROR PROGRAM MISSING, 182
B22 DECOMPRESS SIZE, 182
CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH, 202
Clip Page option, 79
Communication, IEEE 1284 parallel
(bidirectional), 56
Compatibility Mode, IEEE 1284 interface, 56
Compatibility option, 108
249
D
CONFIGURATION
menu, 135
submenu, 136
Configuration
D50 STATUS CLEARING FLASH, 202
D51 PROGRAMMING FLASH LOADING
auto save, 142
PROGRAM INTO FLASH, 202
loading saved, 147
Data Exchange, 170
modify saved, 145
Date option, 114
printing, 146
DBCS Character Sets, 214
save, 141
DBCS Fonts, 214
specify power-up, 144
Define CR code option, 96
Configuration Menu
Define LF code option, 97
move within, 61
Del Char frm Fls option, 108
overview, 65
Del Char frm RAM option, 109
Configure Printer, 61
Del Set frm Fls option, 109
Control Panel, 36
Del Set from RAM option, 109
Cancel key, 37
Delete Config option, 136
Down key, 38
Determine Printhead Wear, 171
Download Combo key, 39
DIAGNOSTICS
Enter key, 37
menu, 138
fault indicator, 39
submenu, 139
Feed key, 37
Direct Thermal Printing, 14
Left key, 39
Display Intensity option, 114
liquid crystal display (LCD), 36
Display Language option, 107
Menu key, 37
Display Ribbon option, 81
Menu Unlock combo key, 39
Do FF at TOF option, 100
online indicator, 39
DO NOT POWER OFF, 202
Pause key, 36
Documentation list, 15
Right key, 38
Down Key, 38
Soft Reset combo key, 39
Download Combo Key, 39
Up key, 38
Download File
Control Print Quality, 171
Download Mode, 162
Controls, 35
Online (PGL Only), 162
Corrupt Code Only, download firmware, 153
Download Firmware Through Serial Port Using
CR Edit option, 99
DOS, 151
Create And Send Download File
Download Printer Firmware If Flash Contains
Download Mode, 162
Corrupt Code, 153
Online (PGL Only), 162
Download Printer Firmware Through Parallel Port
CSC, 233
Using DOS, 151
Customer Support Center, 233
DOWNLOADER ERROR BEYOND 8MB EMC, 183
CUTTER FAULT Check Cutter, 183
DOWNLOADER ERROR EXTERNAL FLASH IS
Cutter Option, cleaning, 168
FULL, 184
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH NOT
ERRASED, 184
250
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH W ADDR
Enter Key, 37
BAD, 184
ENTER to Stop, 192
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH WRITE #1, 184
Environmental, specifications, 211
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH WRITE #2, 184
ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 192
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH WRITE #3, 184
ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM, 193
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH WRITE #4, 184
ERROR INSUFFICIENT DRAM, 185
DOWNLOADER ERROR MAIN FLASH IS
ERROR INSUFFICIENT FLASH, 185
FULL, 184
ERROR OCCURRED CLEARING QUEUES, 185
DOWNLOADER ERROR NO EMC
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM, 193
DETECTED, 184
ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 193
Downloading Optional Fonts to Flash Memory, 157
ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 193
Downloading Printer Firmware Through USB, 156
Error Report option, 103
Downloading TrueType Fonts, 161
ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 193
DRAM Installed option, 140
ERROR WRITING TO FLASH, 193
E
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 185
ETHERNET INITIALIZING, 202
E00 EXE @ ADDR0 message, 186
Ethernet Port option, 129
E01A TYPE 0x40 message, 187
ETHERNET READY, 203
E01B TYPE 0x60 message, 187
ETHERNET RESETTING, 203
E02 MACHINE CHK message, 187
Ethernet Setting option, 129
E03A DSI HASH L message, 188
Exchange, data, 170
E03B DSI HASH S message, 188
Expanded Font option, 101
E03C DSI BAT PL message, 188
Expanded Memory Cartridge, 209, 213
E03D DSI BAT message, 189
Ext Execute Copy option, 99
E03E DSI CXIWX message, 189
Extra Bold Char. option, 113
E03F DSI CXOWX message, 189
F
E03G DSI ECXIWX message, 190
E03H DSI ECXOWX message, 190
Fanfold Media, load, 30
E04A ISI NO TRA message, 190
Fault Indicator, 39
E04B ISI DIRECT message, 191
Fault Message
E04C ISI PROTEC message, 191
305 DPI, 202
E06 NOT ALIGNED message, 191
40V POWER FAIL, 182
E07 ILLEGAL INS message, 192
B10 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED, 182
E08 FLOATINGPNT message, 192
B11 ERROR RAM TEST FAILED, 182
EC SOFTWARE FAIL, 192
B12 ERROR PROGRAM MISSING, 182
EMC FFS option, 110
B22 ERROR DECOMPRESS SIZE, 182
EMC FLASH Installed option, 140
B23 ERROR DECOMPRESS CKSUM, 183
EMC NOT FOUND PWR OFF PRINTER, 184
BAD VFU CHANNEL, 183
EMULATION
CALIBRATION FAIL, 183
menu, 90
CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel-Off, 183
submenus, 96
CUTTER FAULT Check Cutter, 183
Emulation Setup option, 96
Emulations overview, 90
DOWNLOADER ERROR BEYOND 8MB
EMC, 183
251
DOWNLOADER ERROR EXTERNAL FLASH
IS FULL, 184
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH NOT
ERASED, 184
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH W ADDR
BAD, 184
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH
WRITE #1, 184
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH
WRITE #2, 184
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH
WRITE #3, 184
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH
WRITE #4, 184
DOWNLOADER ERROR MAIN FLASH IS
FULL, 184
DOWNLOADER ERROR NO EMC
DETECTED, 184
QUEUES, 185
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE
DRAM, 193
ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 193
ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 193
ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 193
ERROR WRITING TO FLASH, 193
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 185
FILE EXISTS Enable Overwrite, 193
FILE SYS WRITE, 186
FILE SYSTEM FULL Delete Files, 194
FILE SYSTEM FULL File Too Big, 193
FILE SYSTEM FULL Optimize & Reboot, 194
GAP NOT DETECTED, 186
Half Speed Mode, 194
INVALID FILE SYS, 194
LABEL MISSING, 195
E00 EXE @ ADDR0, 186
LABEL READY, 195
E01A TYPE 0x40, 187
LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%, 196
E01B TYPE 0x60, 187
LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH, 196
E02 MACHINE CHK, 187
MEDIA OUT, 196
E03A DSI HASH L, 188
MEMORY REMOVED, 196
E03B DSI HASH S, 188
MENU MODE MEDIA SETUP, 196
E03C DSI BAT PL, 188
MISSING PRINT HEAD, 197
E03D DSI BAT, 189
NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED, 197
E03E DSI CXIWX, 189
OPTION NOT INSTALLED, 197
E03F DSI CXOWX, 189
PGL ERROR, 194
E03G DSI ECXIWX, 190
PRINT HEAD UP, 198
E03H DSI ECXOWX, 190
PRINTER UNDER REMOTE CONTROL, 198
E04A ISI NO TRA, 190
PRINTHEAD HOT, 198
E04B ISI DIRECT, 191
PROGRAM IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THIS
E04C ISI PROTEC, 191
252
ERROR OCCURRED CLEARING
PRINTER, 198
E06 NOT ALIGNED, 191
REWINDER FULL, 198
E07 ILLEGAL INS, 192
RFID CNTRY BAD, 198
E08 FLOATINGPNT, 192
RFID FW ERR, 198
EC SOFTWARE FAIL, 192
RFID TAG FAILURE, 198
EMC NOT FOUND PWR OFF PRINTER, 184
RFID TAG MAX RETRY, 199
ENTER to Stop, 192
Ribbon Low, 199
ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 192
RIBBON OUT, 199
ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM, 193
SECURITY CODE VIOLATION, 199
ERROR INSUFFICIENT DRAM, 185
SERIAL BUFFER OVERFLOW, 200
ERROR INSUFFICIENT FLASH, 185
SERIAL BUFFER OVERRUN, 200
SERIAL FRAMING ERROR, 200
Horizontal Black Marks, sensing, 45
SERIAL PARITY ERROR, 200
Host Form Length option, 98
SOFTWARE ERROR, 200
Host interface characteristics, 210
I
WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD, 201
WIRELESS ADAPTER NOT
COMPATIBLE, 201
I-2/5 Selection option, 102
IEEE 1284 Interface
Fault Messages, 181
Fault Mode, 34
Byte mode, 56
Fault Reprint option, 80
Compatibility mode, 56
Feature File option, 140
Nibble mode, 56
signals, 57
Feed Key, 37
FILE EXISTS Enable Overwrite, 193
Ignore Mode option, 100
FILE SYS WRITE, 186
Ignore Text option, 99
FILE SYSTEM FULL Delete Files, 194
Inboard Notches, sensing, 45
FILE SYSTEM FULL File Too Big, 193
Indicator
FILE SYSTEM FULL Optimize & Reboot, 194
fault, 39
Firmware Download Utility, download printer
online, 39
firmware, 150
Indicators, 35
FLASH Installed option, 140
Indicators, specifications, 208
Flash Memory, load, 149
Installation
printer, 18
Fonts
INTERFACE
Downloading, 157
Downloading TrueType, 161
Forms Handling option, 101
Full Media Rewinder, 213, 219
G
menu, 115
submenu, 118
Interface options, 214
Interfaces, 53
Centronics parallel, 54
IEEE 1284, 56
Gap Length option, 87
GAP NOT DETECTED, 186
INVALID FILE SYS, 194
L
Gap Sensing, 46
Gap Windowing option, 87
Gap/Mark Sensor option, 84
Label Length option, 71
Gap/Mark Thresh option, 85
Label Length, RS-232 Serial, 59
H
LABEL MISSING, 195
Label Missing option, 79
Half Speed Mode, 194
LABEL READY, 195
Hardware options, 213
Label Width option, 72
Head Auto-Cal option, 86
Labeling Applications, 160
Head On Time option, 140
LCD, 36
Head Resolution option, 141
Ld Char at PwrUp option, 109
Head Voltage option, 141
Ld Char from Fls option, 109
Hex Dump Mode option, 140
Ld Set at PwrUp option, 109
Hidden Menus, 63
Ld Set from Fls option, 109
Hor Image Shift option, 72
Lead PDF Dist option, 102
253
Left Key, 39
Media Selection, 16
Liquid Crystal Display, 36
Media Sensor, cleaning, 166
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), 36
Media Sensors
Load Config, 136
different media types, 46
Load Fanfold Media, 30
media with gapped liner, 46
Load Flash Memory, 149
media with horizontal black marks, 45
Load Media, 25, 30
media with inboard notches, 45
Load Ribbon, 22
media with no label length indicators, 45
Load Roll Media, 25
positioning, 44
Load Saved Configuration, 147
MEDIA SETUP
Loading Printer Firmware Using Firmware
menu, 68
Download Utility, 150
submenus, 69
LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%, 196
Media specifications matrix, 207
LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH, 203
Media Thickness Adjustment, 41
LOADING PROGRAMINTO FLASH, 196
Media Types, sensing, 46
Locking the Enter key, 37
Media Width Adjustment, 42
M
Media wtih Gapped Liner, sensing, 46
MEMORY REMOVED, 196
Main FFS option, 110
Memory, specifications, 209
Main Menu, 66
Menu
Manual
CONFIGURATION, 135
conventions, 14
DIAGNOSTICS, 138
related documents, 15
EMULATION, 90
special information, 15
hidden, 63
warnings, 15
INTERFACE, 115
Manual Calibrate, run, 50
main menu configuration, 66
Mark Sensing, 46
MEDIA SETUP, 68
Mark TOF Detect option, 89
overview, 65
Max Cache Memory option, 112
PRINTER SETUP, 105
Max Cached Char option, 112
select option, 63
Max Font Buffer option, 111
Media, 229
SENSOR SETUP, 83
Menu Changes Detected prompt, 143
dimensions, 207
Menu Key, 37
load, 25, 30
Menu mode, 34
Printronix, 229
MENU MODE MEDIA SETUP, 196
specifications, 206
Menu Unlock Combo Key, 39
usage, 230
Min Calib Delta option, 88
Media Cutter, 213
MISSING PRINT HEAD, 197
Media Cutter, specifications, 209
Modes
Media Handling Modes, 40
media handling, 40
Media Handling option, 69
operating, 34
MEDIA OUT, 196
Media Profile, run, 48
254
Modify Saved Configurations, 145
N
P
Name Config option, 137
PAA:Status option, 107
Nibble Mode, IEEE 1284 interface, 56
Paper Out Thresh option, 85
No Label Length Indicators, sensing, 45
Parallel Port option, 119
NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED, 197
Parallel Port, load firmware, 151
Num Auto Labels option, 78
Pause Key, 36
O
PGL Emulation
submenus, 96
OCR-A Chars. option, 113
PGL ERROR, 194
OCR-B Chars. option, 113
PGL Normal option, 101
Offline Mode, 34
Physical Specifications, 211
Online Auto-Cal option, 87
PI Slew Range option, 99
Online Indicator, 39
Pin Assignments, Centronics parallel interface, 54
Online Mode, 34
Platen Roller, cleaning, 166
Online Status indicator, 36
Port Type option, 118
Operating Modes, 34
Position Media Sensors, 44
Fault, 34
Power Cord Requirements, 21
Menu, 34
Power on IGP/PGL option, 99
Offline, 34
Power On Printer, 35
Online, 34
POWER SAVER MODE, 203
Optimize&Reboot option, 110
Power Saver Time option, 107
Optimized Ratio option, 98
Power source and grounding, 210
OPTION NOT INSTALLED, 197
Power Switch, 35
Optional Features, 13
Power-Up Config option, 136
Optional Host Interfaces, 53
Power-up Configuration, specify, 144
Options
Power-up State option, 107
DBCS character sets, 214
Preparser Cmd option, 103
DBCS fonts, 214
Preparser Port option, 104
expanded memory cartridge, 213
Print Config option, 136
full media rewinder, 213
Print Configuration, 146
hardware, 213
Print Direction option, 78
media cutter, 213
Print Error Log option, 140
printer, 213
Print File List option, 110
real time clock, 214
PRINT HEAD UP, 198
RFID, 214
Print Intensity option, 69
standard peel, 213
Print Mode option, 69
standard peel with liner rewinder, 213
Print Quality, control, 171
standard peel without liner rewinder, 217
Print Speed option, 69
Orientation option, 73
Print Tests option, 139
255
Printer
grey, 139
alarms, 181
grid, 139
change settings, 64
left test, 139
configure, 61
RFID report, 139
control panel, 36
right test, 139
controls, 35
PRINTER UNDER REMOTE CONTROL, 198
exterior cleaning, 165
Printer Usage option, 140
fault messages, 181
Printhead
general cleaning, 165
cleaning, 166
indicators, 35
replace, 172
installation, 18
Printhead Alignment, 43
interior cleaning, 165
PRINTHEAD HOT, 198
model, 11
Printhead Pressure Adjustment, 41
move within configuration menu, 61
PrintHead Usage option, 140
operating modes, 34
Printhead Wear, 171
optional features, 13
Printing Adjustments, media width, 42
options, 213
Printing Process, 14
physical specifications, 211
position media sensors, 44
direct thermal printing, 14
thermal transfer printing, 14
power cord requirements, 21
Printing, specifications, 205
power on, 35
Printronix Media, 229
power switch, 35
usage, 230
printing process, 14
Printronix Windows Driver, 161
restore operation, 174
Problems, solve, 175
self-test, 169
Processing Time, improve, 169
set configuration parameters, 61
PROGRAM IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THIS
setup, 21
PRINTER, 198
solve problems, 175
Protect Config option, 136
standard features, 11
Ptr On Time option, 140
standard interfaces, 53
Ptx Setup Parse option, 108
unpack, 17
Ptx Setup SFCC option, 108
warranty, 235
PTX_SETUP, 163
Printer Mgmt option, 121
Pwr Save Control option, 107
PRINTER RESETTING, 203
Pwr Up Auto-Cal option, 86
R
PRINTER SETUP
menu, 105
submenus, 106
Printer tests
256
Real Time Clock, 214
Repeat Form Opt option, 103
barcode, 139
Replace Printhead, 172
checkerboard, 139
Reset Cfg Names option, 137
combo test, 139
Reset Head Data option, 141
current config., 139
Restore Printer To Operation, 174
Ethernet test page, 139
RESTORING BOOT CODE, 203
Ret. Status Port option, 108
Select SFCC option, 97
REWINDER FULL, 198
Select SO Char option, 100
Rewinder, full media, 219
Self-test, printer, 169
RFID, 214
Sensed Distance, 85
RFID CNTRY BAD, 198
SENSOR SETUP
menu, 83
RFID FW ERR, 198
RFID TAG FAILURE, 198
submenus, 84
RFID TAG MAX RETRY, 199
SERIAL BUFFER OVERFLOW, 200
Ribbon
SERIAL BUFFER OVERRUN, 200
load, 22
SERIAL FRAMING ERROR, 200
Ribbon 8300, 228
Serial Interface, RS-232, 59
Ribbon 8500, 228
SERIAL PARITY ERROR, 200
Ribbon 8600, 228
Serial Port option, 123
Ribbon 8700, 228
Serial Port, download firmware, 151
specifications, 208
Set Label Length option, 81
Ribbon Low, 199
Set Lock Key option, 111
Ribbon Low option, 81
Set Printer Configuration Parameters, 61
RIBBON OUT, 199
Settings, change, 64
Ribbons, 16, 228
Setup Printer, 21
load fanfold media, 30
usage, 230
Right Key, 38
load ribbon, 22
Roll Media, load, 25
load roll media, 25
RS-232 Serial Interface, 59
Signals, Centronics parallel interface, 55
Signals, IEEE 1284 Interface, 57
cable length, 59
Run Auto Calibrate, 47
Skip Cmd Prefix option, 99
Run Auto-Cal option, 84
Slash 0 option, 97
Run Manual Cal option, 86
Slew Speed Ctrl option, 78
Run Manual Calibrate, 50
SMT:Status option, 106
Run Media Profile, 48
Soft Reset Combo Key, 39
Run Profile option, 85
Software Build option, 139
S
SOFTWARE ERROR, 200
Solve Printer Problems, 175
Save Char to Fls option, 109
Special Information, 15
Save Config, 136
Specifications
Save Configuration, 141
acoustic noise, 211
Save Set to Fls option, 109
environmental, 211
Save, auto, 142
host interface, 210
Scalable Size option, 101
media, 206
SECURITY CODE VIOLATION, 199
media cutter, 209
Select Char option, 100
media dimensions, 207
Select LPI option, 96
memory, 209
Select Menu Option, 63
optional expanded memory, 209
Select option, 96
physical, 211
257
power, 210
THE ENTER KEY IS LOCKED, 204
printing, 205
THE ENTER KEY IS UNLOCKED, 204
ribbon, 208
Thermal Consumables, 16
media selection, 16
switches, 208
Standard Chars. option, 113
ribbons, 16
Standard Features, 11
Thermal Printer Technology, 14
Standard Host Interfaces, 53
Thermal Transfer Printing, 14
Standard Interfaces, 53
Thermal Transfer Ribbons, 228
usage, 230
Standard Peel, 213
Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder, 213, 222
Threshold Range option, 89
Standard Peel Without Liner Rewinder, 217
To stop Press Enter, 204
STATUS LOADING FIRMWARE, 203
TOF Adjust Mode option, 82
Status Message
TOF Adjust option, 82
203 DPI, 202
TOF Detect Fault option, 82
CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH, 202
Training classes, 234
D50 STATUS CLEARING FLASH, 202
Troubleshoot, 169
D51 PROGRAMMING FLASH LOADING
PROGRAM INTO FLASH, 202
control panel, 175
improve processing time, 169
DO NOT POWER OFF, 202
power failures, 176
ETHERNET INITIALIZING, 202
print quality, 176
ETHERNET READY, 203
printer operation, 180
ETHERNET RESETTING, 203
printer problems, 175
LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH, 203
ribbon, 181
POWER SAVER MODE, 203
TrueType Fonts, downloaded, 160
PRINTER RESETTING, 203
Trunc Dyn Data option, 102
U
RESTORING BOOT CODE, 203
STATUS LOADING FIRMWARE, 203
TESTING HARDWARE PLEASE WAIT, 203
Units option, 81
THE ENTER KEY IS LOCKED, 204
Unlocking the Enter key, 37
THE ENTER KEY IS UNLOCKED, 204
Unpack Printer, 17
To stop Press Enter, 204
Up Key, 38
Storage Select option, 104
UPC Descenders option, 101
Supplies, 228
USB Port option, 121
Supplies Department, 233
USB, download printer firmware, 156
Switches, specifications, 208
Use Label Length option, 88
T
Tall Characters option, 113
User-Def Ratio option, 102
Using Downloaded TrueType Fonts, 160
V
Tear Off Adjust option, 70
Tear-Strip Time option, 79
Var Form Adjust option, 98
Technical support, 233
Var Form Type option, 98
Test Count option, 139
Ver Image Shift option, 72
TESTING HARDWARE PLEASE WAIT, 203
Vertical Adjust option, 103
258
W
WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD, 201
Warnings, 15
Warranty information, 235
Windows Driver, 161
WIRELESS ADAPTER NOT COMPATIBLE, 201
WLAN Setting option, 132
259
260
*251674-001*
251674-001B